JP7207728B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (start winning). ) is executed, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state is entered in which the special variable winning device is released. In such a gaming machine, the variation pattern that defines the effect of the variable display game is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns.

JP 2015-180269 A

However, the selection of the variation pattern becomes monotonous, and the amusement of the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
a game control means for controlling a game;
a normal variable winning device that satisfies the starting condition by winning a game ball,
The game control means is
It is possible to generate a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device than in the normal game state,
When the result of the game results in a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated after the stop display period for displaying the result of the game without going through the special game state. and
The special results and the specific results each include a plurality of types of results,
determining which of the special result, the specific result, and the losing result as the result of the game by a first lottery random number;
when the lottery result obtained by the first lottery random number is the special result or the specific result, determining the type of the special result or the specific result using one second lottery random number;
A variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game;
A variation pattern scenario in which information about the transition of the variation pattern table in the specific gaming state is defined,
When the specified result is derived, the variation pattern scenario to be used in the specified game state based on the specified result is selected based on the type of the specified result.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of a special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of a big hit design, the distribution rate of a small hit design, and the distribution rate of a support per design. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining transition of a group of change selection tables; It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit determination process and a small-hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining production mode information check processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure normal processing shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a special effect performed during a variable display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a figure which shows an example of the additional production performed after the special-figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" is over. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the change of the visibility in an example of production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a second modification of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing an example of a distribution rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting entrance switch common process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the third modification of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing the distribution ratio. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 4 of a support hit determination, Comprising: It is a figure which shows a distribution rate. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a diagram showing distribution ratios. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a flowchart for explaining specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a figure explaining other modification 11, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a small-hit remaining ball process. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the second embodiment.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

A display plate 350 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14 . The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a light guide plate is used to make an image emerge when light is introduced from the side edge, but it may be configured by a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 does not display a predetermined display, it is transparent so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game board 30 behind. When a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350, the visibility of the game board 30 behind the predetermined display is lowered. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through a predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for the outflow. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The performance button 25 also incorporates a drive source for vibrating the performance button 25 . That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of making a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25 . The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projected state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state). can be

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a hitting ball shooting device, and the like. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

On the right side of the effect button 25 is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine. a return button (discharge button) 27b to be operated, a balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever to be operated to flow down the game balls in the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23 27d, a mobile terminal placement section 28 or the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone owned by the player is provided. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. do. In addition, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the display device 41 (see FIG. 3) is a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game). It can be performed.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 for forming a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 is operable between a position above the center case 40 and a position indicated by a dotted line, which is a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c, but the normal variable prize device The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape by opening.
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) is provided to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area. ) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Also, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 5) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of playing balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), and the number detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed is designed not to open a new upper grand prize opening.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided. In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), special figure 1 display for special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and special figure 2 variation Special figure 2 display for display game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) and special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 (C0, C1 ) and a special figure 2 holding indicator 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and a game state that displays the game state of the gaming machine 10. and a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). The game state display unit 56 includes a first game state display unit 56a (C6) for notifying the player of a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player (a method of hitting corresponding to the game state), out of left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A second game state display unit 56b (C7) for notifying that it is in a time saving state (at the time of operation of a variable time shortening function), and notifying that the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state when the game machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display portion 56c (D7) is provided.
In addition, the collective display device 50 has a normal pattern display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a normal pattern suspension display device 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. I have.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation pattern numbers are alternately changed as shown in FIG. LED lamps A0, A2, A4 and A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5 and A7 are turned off) and LED lamps A1, A3, A5 and A7 are lit (LED lamps A0, A2, A7 are turned off). A4 and A6 are extinguished) are alternately switched to indicate that they are fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 ~A7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the result mode (special result mode) other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps A0 to A7 The game results are displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern number is alternately changed, for example, as shown in FIG. LED lamps B0, B2, B4 and B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B7 are extinguished) and LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B7 are lit (LED lamps B0, B2, B7 are turned off). B4 and B6 are extinguished) are alternately switched to indicate that the current is fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp B0 is lit and LED lamp B1 to B7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 pending display 53 shows the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 pending display device 54 shows the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52, for example. As shown in 4(d), it is displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3). The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

The round display unit 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and during the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected by . The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), the LED is turned on.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns the LED off when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when the power is turned on in a high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 57, during the fluctuation display of the general pattern fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. By alternately switching between the lighting state and the lighting state of the LED lamps D4 and D6, the fluctuation is displayed. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, the LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that it is a hit. Any one of them (for example, the LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate the failure.
The general pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of balls that have not been digested out of the number of passing balls of the general pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 57 (the number of normal pattern starting memories = the number of reservations), for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (h), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 has an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, etc. A normal power supply unit. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a special symbol random number for determining the winning of the special symbol variation display game, a special symbol random number for determining the symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and a variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game ( Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing An interface chip that is connected to an out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. (Proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. be done. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball outlet switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and the detection signal of the game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10, etc., and the detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12, etc. of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position, and the game machine is powered on while operating (pressing down) the RAM initialization switch 112 to set the probability setting value. can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and role ratio are displayed.

Also, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device. Although displayed in 153, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122 , 123 , 124 and 126 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are once captured by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and general electrical solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output, and the currently selected This is a port for outputting display data of the performance display device 153 that displays probability setting values.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138 c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 , and the external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. DC 5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the fifth driver 138e as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V can be driven.
Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. Absent.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the gate The switch 34a uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. It is In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having LEDs (light emitting diodes) (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from the ball shooting device. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34 and a general winning opening 35. , the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and enter the game area 32 is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning Players can aim to win prizes in the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general prize winning port 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 57 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. The normal figure display 57 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information. may be configured.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal pattern indicator 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display 57 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) Along with storing, a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the special pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random value is stored in the RAM 111C as first start memory and second start memory. And, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and in the display device 41 of the center case 40 is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) special figure 1 variable display game ( 1st special figure fluctuation display game) execution control, and special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning area) It constitutes execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means changes the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. are configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and it becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

FIG. 7 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game: a big hit, a small hit, and a support hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 7(b), for example, in the big hit, the probability variable A jackpot in which the probability variable A jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the jackpot pattern (jackpot result mode), and the probability variable B jackpot pattern in which the probability variable B jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. There are three types: B jackpot and normal jackpot in which normal jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7C, for example, as shown in FIG. 7(c), the small winning A pattern is stopped and displayed as a small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning), and the small winning B pattern is stopped and displayed. There are two types of small hits B. Further, as shown in FIG. 7(d), for example, as shown in FIG. There are three types of support hit B and support hit C in which the support hit C symbol is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the support hit is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and can be said to be one type of winning pattern.

The probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (probability variation operating area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability variation state) after the end of the special game state. Possibility of inflow of game balls is low, indicating that it is difficult to enter a high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area). If game balls do not flow in, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the variable probability A jackpot and the variable probability B jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round and the specific area (variable probability operation area) is opened. conduct. Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility that game balls flow into a specific area (probability variable operating area). Then, V-less opening is performed in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in rounds other than the specific round, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round, and short opening with V is performed to open a specific area (probability variable operation area). Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, V-less opening is performed in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in rounds other than the specific round, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (small hit game state) based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

FIG. 7(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 1", "setting 2", and "setting 3". can be different. Also, in FIG. 7(a), the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 4", "setting 5", and "setting 6". can be different. Also, for example, the distribution rate of the jackpot in "setting 1" and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "setting 2" are the first distribution rate (for example, low probability: 219/65536, high probability: 2190/65536) and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "Setting 3" and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "Setting 4" are the second distribution rate (for example, low probability: 262/65536, high probability: 2620/65536), The distribution rate of the jackpot at "Setting 5" and the distribution rate of the jackpot at "Setting 6" may be set as the third distribution rate (for example, low probability: 291/65536, high probability: 2910/65536).

Also, in FIG. 7(a), the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different. In addition, in FIG. 7(a), the distribution rate of the small hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), but different It's okay to be there.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), the distribution rate per support is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different.
That is, only the winning probability of the big win is changed by changing the probability set value, and the probability of the small win and the supporting win is not changed.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), it is possible to win a support hit only in a low probability state, but it may be possible to win in a high probability state as well. In this case, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is low probability state, it may be higher than when it is high probability state, or when it is low probability state and when it is high probability state , or may be lower in the case of the low-probability state than in the case of the high-probability state.

FIG. 7(b) is an example of the distribution rate of the jackpot type. In FIG. 7(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 7(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
FIG. 7(c) is an example of the distribution rate of the small hit type. In FIG. 7(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 7(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.

FIG. 7(d) is an example of distribution ratios for types of support hits. In FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the type of support hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
Also, in FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 1 is higher than the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 2, but the distribution rate of per support in special figure 1 The distribution rate of C may be the same as the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, or may be lower than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2. In addition, in FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the support hit A in the special figure 1 and the distribution rate of the support hit B in the special figure 1 are the same, but they may be different. In addition, in FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the support per A in the special figure 2 and the distribution rate of the support per B in the special figure 2 are the same, but they may be different. Also, the sorting rate of the types of support hits in the case where it is possible to win the support hit even in the high probability state may be the same as or different from that in the low probability state.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a first specific game state ST11, a second specific game state ST12, and a third specific game state ST13. In addition, as the game state, there is a first special game state (big win game state) based on the first special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) based on the second special result (small win). is omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result (jackpot) is derived to be controlled by the game control device 100, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the game The main starting area which is the starting area to be mainly aimed at in the state, the main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST14 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST11 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. And there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the latent mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The second specific game state ST12 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.
The third specific game state ST13 is the same as the second specific game state ST12 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST14 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST13 is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST14 because there is general power support, and the first specific game state ST11 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST14 and the third game state ST11 This state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state ST13. The second specific game state ST12 is a high-probability state and has a general electric support, so it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, the first specific game state ST11, and the third specific game state ST13.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot), derivation of the support hit, and completion of the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13, and the special Of the probability variable jackpots to be in a high probability state after the end of the game state, when the probability variable A jackpot is obtained, the transition is made to the second specific game state ST12, and when the probability variable B jackpot is obtained, the shift is shifted to the first specific game state ST11. .

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and becomes a special game state, and there is V passage in the special game state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (the probability variation operation area ) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, the state shifts to the second specific game state ST12. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state When the ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the game moves to the first specific game state ST11 after the end of the special game state. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is no V passage in the special game state does not flow), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the third specific game state ST13. Since the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of times of ST (for example, 2000 times) which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state is set, and the execution of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST11. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the normal game state ST14 may be entered.
In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST12. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, it may be shifted to the normal game state ST14 (or the third specific game state ST13).

When the normal jackpot is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the specific game state ST13, the game shifts to a normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the number of times the normal jackpot is supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the probability variable jackpot A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST12, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST12 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit in the second specific game state ST12, the game moves to the first specific game state ST11. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the variable probability A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of times of support for the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to ST13. That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot is derived passes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support hit is derived is the special It does not go through the game state.

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "20 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "20 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, the third specific game state ST13 is to be stayed until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. is possible, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to a normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the support hit C out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, the third specific game state ST13 is to be stayed until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. is possible, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to a normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the effect executed during the chance mode (using the display device 41 or the like) is performed in the case of shifting to the chance mode via the special game state and the case of shifting to the chance mode without passing through the special game state. production by display, production by sound using speakers 19a, 19b, etc., production by light using frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc., production by movable members using board production device 44, frame production device, etc. , at least one of the variation pattern selection modes) can be made different. That is, the production mode of the production executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the big hit (normal jackpot, probability variable A jackpot), and the production mode executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (support hit A to C). Since the performance mode can be made different, depending on the performance mode of the performance executed during the chance mode, whether the chance mode is generated based on the derivation of the big win or the one generated based on the derivation of the support hit. It can be suggested that

FIG. 9 shows an example of a variation pattern selection mode in the third specific game state ST13.
As shown in FIG. 9A, this embodiment has variation selection table groups A to D as variation selection table groups in which selectable variation patterns are defined. These variation selection table groups differ in the types of selectable variation patterns and selection ratios. As a result, the tendency of the execution mode of the special figure variation display game differs depending on the variation selection table group to be used.

The type of variation selection table group to be used can be changed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the third specific game state ST13 reaches a specified number of times (here, 20 times, 100 times).
A variation pattern scenario that defines the process of changing the variation selection table group differs for each type of chance mode. That is, the variation pattern scenario to be selected is made different depending on whether the derived result is the normal jackpot or the support hits A to C.

In the case of chance mode A, which is a chance mode corresponding to support hit A, a variation pattern scenario using variation selection table group A is selected for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games.
In the case of chance mode B, which is a chance mode corresponding to support win B, the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and for the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games. A variation pattern scenario using variation selection table group B is selected.

In the case of the chance mode C, which is the chance mode corresponding to the support win C, the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and for the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games. Using the variation selection table group B, a variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group C is selected for the 101st to 1000th special figure variation display games.
In the case of chance mode D, which is a chance mode corresponding to a normal jackpot, the variation selection table group A is used for the 0th to 20th special figure variation display games, and the 21st to 100th special figure variation display games are varied. A variation pattern scenario using selection table group D is selected.

By doing so, even if the third specific game state ST13 is the same, the execution mode of the special figure variation display game will be different due to the different variation pattern scenarios, and the execution mode of the special figure variation display game will change. It is born and can improve the interest of the game. In particular, both the supporter win B and the normal jackpot are in the third specific game state ST13 over the period of executing the special figure variation display game 100 times. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The selection of the variation selection table group is not limited to those described above, and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9(b), any one of a plurality of types of chance modes corresponding to support hits A to C and normal jackpots may be selected.
This example includes variation pattern scenarios using variation selection tables specific to each of the support hits A to C and the normal jackpot, and it is possible to guess the type of chance mode from the variation pattern.
For example, since chance mode A2 uses unique variation selection table group D, it is possible to guess that it is chance mode A, and chance mode B2 uses unique variation selection table groups E and F, so chance mode It becomes possible to guess that it is B. In addition, since the chance mode C2 uses the unique variation selection table groups G and H, it can be assumed that the chance mode is C, and the chance mode D2 uses the unique variation selection table groups J and K. It is possible to guess that it is chance mode D,
By doing so, the game becomes more diverse, and the enjoyment of guessing the type of the chance mode can be given, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the 20th and 100th special figures from the start of the third specific game state ST13, which is a delimiter at which the third specific game state ST13 may end, is the timing at which the changeable selection table group can be changed in the change pattern scenario. Although the variable display game is executed, the timing is not limited to this, and can be set at any timing.
Also, the change timing of the variation selection table group may be different for each chance mode.

Also, instead of determining all the variable selection table groups to be used at the start of the chance mode, it is possible to select the next variable selection table group to be used from multiple types at the timing when the variation selection table group can be changed. Also good.
Also, instead of a predetermined timing, a lottery for changing the variation selection table group may be performed each time the special figure variation display game is executed, and the change may be made when the lottery is won.
Also, although the third specific game state ST13 has been described in FIG. 9, it is possible to sequentially change the variation selection table group similarly in other game states.

In this embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), that is, when the support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST13, the number of times of support is reset and a new Reset the support count corresponding to each support.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), in the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", the support hit is reached in the 10th rotation. If A is derived, the number of remaining supports is changed from 90 to 20.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(b), in the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation. If so, the number of remaining supports will be changed from 10 to 20.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the production mode is changed in accordance with the change in the number of remaining support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10(a), when the number of remaining supports is changed from 90 times to 20 times, the production mode changes from chance mode B (chance mode corresponding to support win B) to chance mode. It switches to A (chance mode corresponding to support hit A). Also, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10(b), the production mode switches from the chance mode B to the chance mode A when the number of remaining supports is changed from 10 times to 20 times. Along with this, the variation pattern scenario is also switched, and the variation selection table group is reset according to the switched variation pattern scenario.

Incidentally, when a new support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern scenario different from the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the derived support hit may be set.
For example, it is possible to set a specific variation pattern scenario different from the variation pattern scenario that can be selected when a support win is derived in the normal game state ST14. In this specific variation pattern scenario, a variation pattern scenario is set to select a specific variation selection table group different from the variation selection table group that can be selected when a support win is derived in the normal game state ST14. Also good. By doing so, when the support hit is derived for the first time in one continuous third specific game state ST13, the variation selection table group is changed, but after that, when the support hit is derived, the variation The selection table group is maintained, and it is possible to give the impression that the continuous third specific game state ST13 is one by deriving the support hits a plurality of times.

Moreover, it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, chance mode B may be continued even after the number of remaining support times is changed to 20 times.
Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed. Specifically, for example, when the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit C, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode C (chance mode corresponding to the supporter hit C). , As shown in FIG. 10, if the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit A, switching the production mode from the chance mode B to the chance mode A results in a rank down, so the number of remaining supports. The chance mode B may be continued (or switched to a chance mode different from the chance mode A or the chance mode B) even after is changed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count.
Specifically, for example, as shown in the left figure of FIG. If the support hit A is derived in 11, the number of remaining support is changed from 90 times to 110 times (= 90 times + 20 times), and the result is as shown in the right figure of FIG. In the 3rd specific game state ST13 which has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game which is "support hit B", when the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation, the remaining number of support times is changed from 10 times to 30 times. It may be changed to times (=10 times+20 times).

In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is You may make it change to the said upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 11(a), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining support count is changed. Chance mode B may be continued even after Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (advantageous for the player) method) may be adopted. Specifically, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. If the support hit A is derived in 2, the number of support times corresponding to the new support hit is 20 times, which is less than the remaining number of support times (90 times). As shown in the right figure of FIG. 11(b), in the third specific game state ST13 that has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation. In that case, the number of support times corresponding to the new support hit is 20 times, which is more than the remaining number of support times (10 times), so the remaining number of support times is changed from 10 times to 20 times. Also good.

In this case, the presentation mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in the right diagram of FIG. 11(b), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining support count may be changed. The chance mode B may be continued even after is changed. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, the effects performed during execution of the support winning game (the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support winning") are special effects such as battle effects (described later).
The game machine 10 (that is, the control shown in FIG. 11(b) is performed which adopts the greater one of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support win (whichever is more advantageous for the player). In the gaming machine 10), a special effect is provided only during execution of a support winning game in which the number of times of support is adopted (for example, a special figure variation display game in which the result in the right diagram of FIG. 11B is "support winning A"). Even if the special effect is not performed during the execution of the support win game in which the number of support is not adopted (for example, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result in the left diagram of FIG. 11 (b) is "support win A") good.
The support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is a variation pattern that takes into account the execution of a special effect during the support hit game, so the special effect is executed during the support hit game. If not, it is preferable to make adjustments such as making the temporary stop display time of the game result longer than in the case of executing the special effect.

Further, in the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 11(b), as a result of the support win game in which the number of support is not adopted, the support win symbol (here, the support win A symbol) is stopped and displayed. Not limited. For example, as a result of a win-win-support game in which the number of times of support is not adopted, instead of win-win-support symbols, losing symbols may be stopped and displayed. In the game machine 10 configured to adopt the larger one of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support win (whichever is more advantageous for the player), the effect control device 300 receives the received signal from the game control device 100. Based on the command, it is determined whether or not the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit. Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, the number of times of support based on the decoration special figure command for notifying the stop pattern on the display device 41, and the time reduction for notifying the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of support) It is judged that the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the support number corresponding to the new support hit when compared with the support number based on the variable number command. Then, when it is determined that the game control device 100 determines not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit, as a result of the support hit game, the pattern specified by the decoration special figure command (the new support hit In place of the support hit symbol corresponding to ), the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the support hit derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support) is the support hit A, but it is not limited to this. That is, the support win A may be derived during the chance mode, the support win B may be derived during the chance mode, and the support win C may be derived during the chance mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is the SP reach of the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "loss" It is the same as the fluctuation pattern that occurs. In other words, the SP reach occurs in the support winning game. In addition, in the present embodiment, if the result is a special figure variation display game other than "support hit", and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs, the special figure Special effects such as battle effects (to be described later) can be executed even during execution of the figure-variable display game.
In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be executable even during execution of a special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be dedicated to the support winning game, and may not be executed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "big hit" or "lost". .

In addition, the support hit variation pattern may be the same as a variation pattern that does not cause SP reach among the variation patterns selected when the result is a "big hit" or "loss", or it may be the same as a support hit game. may be a variation pattern of
For example, if you are not in the chance mode, you can select a variation pattern dedicated to the support game, and if you are in the chance mode, you can use a variation pattern that is combined with a special figure variation display game other than the support game (for example, the result is By selecting a variation pattern that causes SP reach among the variation patterns selected in the case of "jackpot" or "losing", the dedicated variation pattern has a longer variation time than the shared variation pattern. may be set as a variation pattern. As a result, the variation time of the support winning game that is executed when the chance mode is not on is longer than the variation time of the support winning game that is performed when the chance mode is on. During the fluctuation time of the support winning game, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection and effect explanation etc. related to the chance mode (third specific game state ST13), and the effect (fanfare effect) executed at the start of the chance mode etc.).

Alternatively, the stop display time of the support winning game may be longer than the stop display time of the special figure variation display game other than the support winning game. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection and production explanations related to the chance mode during the stop display time of the support game, so the production (fanfare production, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode You can have a connection with

Alternatively, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode. Specifically, for example, when the result of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode is "loss", the result is "loss" as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game. A variation pattern with a relatively long variation time among the variation patterns selected in the case, or a variation pattern dedicated to the first special figure variation display game by shifting to the chance mode may be selected. As a result, when the chance mode is started, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection, effect explanation, and the like related to the chance mode. In addition, this makes it possible to accumulate the second starting memory before the game is switched to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, it becomes the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. By generating the second start memory by, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, and the game is played so as to be advantageous for the player. can proceed.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the top 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X10; Y). X11), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM It is determined whether the value of area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. That is, when the game machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b A notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is provided by outputting a voice by
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N), that is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the process proceeds to step X41 to recover from the power failure. Perform the processing when recovery is normal.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, a command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b The fact that the probability setting value is being confirmed is notified by outputting a voice by

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) of the timer interrupt processing when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34). Returning, if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 12 and 13) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. During the period from the interrupt enabling process (step X32) to the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). . In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set performs power failure recovery processing (step X41) for saving initial values at the time of power failure recovery in areas to be initialized (for example, power failure inspection area, checksum area, and area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command etc. Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Without doing, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. It should be noted that in step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, etc. is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers After saving the initial value (start value) of the pattern random number and the random number (hit random number) for determining the hit of the normal pattern in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X48), the interrupt is permitted (step X49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, and the winning random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special pattern random number and the hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the periodic CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). In addition, in the special pattern random number and the hit random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the special symbol random numbers and winning random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, the interrupt prohibiting process (step X51) is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

The initial value random number update process in step X50 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. It has the advantage of being made

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61 ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. and an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , the lever solenoid 38f, the general electric solenoid 37c), and the like (step X105). When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106), random number update processing 1 (step X107), and random number update processing 2 (step X108) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the special figure game processing (step X112) for performing the processing relating to the special figure variation display game, the normal figure game processing (step X112) for performing the processing relating to the normal figure variation display game X114) is performed, and the segment LED editing process (step X115) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content is performed. conduct.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) of checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and determination of whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153, and timer interrupt processing are completed. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is performed. A game result pre-determination is carried out to determine in advance the game result based on the prize winning at the stage before the start of the figure fluctuation display game.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls is monitored by the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 A process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 39a is performed. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A7). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A8).

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A10) is performed.

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of big win and the big prize winning opening of each big win. Processing during special figure display (step A11) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set, and a large winning opening remains. A large winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A8, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing.
At step A8, if the special figure game process number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal process is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A16) during a small hit fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A8, if the special game processing number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for setting the ending command and performing small hit remaining ball processing is performed. .
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A19) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20), the symbol variation control process (step A21) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. . Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol variation control process (step A23) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A5; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A20, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting gate switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize to the first start port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during the special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104 ).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and transmit the command to the effect control device 300 Effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A109), perform hardware random number acquisition processing (step A110), and check whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second start port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112). It shifts to the processing of A114 and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, when it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special The starting port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 17 shows the hardware random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process.
In this hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning opening 37), the no winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set ( Step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a (step A122).
If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if the random number has not been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37), set the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored (step A126), and obtain a hardware random number. End the process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure start switch common processing, first, of the start switch 1 switch 36a and the start switch 2 37a, information on the number of winnings to the start switch to be monitored is sent to the game machine 10. Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to an external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A136), and save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139).

Next, the special symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the special symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).
Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of start opening switches and special figure reservations to be monitored (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148), and perform special figure start opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and starts the variable display game execution right. It constitutes a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 19, first, a big-hit determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a special figure symbol random number check table for big hit corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and a step of special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for a small hit is set (step A161), and prepared at step A140 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the support hit determination process (step A163) that determines whether or not the support hit is determined by whether or not the big hit random value matches the support hit determination value. I do. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164; N), stop symbol information indicating a loss is set (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special figure symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared at step A140 of the special figure start opening switch common processing The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process proceeds to step A168.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A171).
After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A172), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A173), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). determination of whether or not) constitutes a prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309; N) sets the customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. That is, when the starting condition is not established although the special figure fluctuation display game can be started, a customer waiting demonstration command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, at step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302). Then, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A305; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306). Then, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0", special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 21(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A321), and the first To determine whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not while setting deviation information and big win information in the big hit flag 1 for deciding whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or not. Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the target.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A341), and the second To determine whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not while setting deviation information and big win information in the big win flag 2 for deciding whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. Big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 22(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step A362), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step A363). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random value matches the small hit determination value A small hit determination process (step A367) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 and saved. Then (step A369), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A370).

If it is in a high probability state (step A370; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area. On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (step A370; N), the support hit determination process (step A371).

Then, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is a support hit (step A372; Y), the support hit flag 1 area in which the losing information was saved in step A361 is overwritten with the support hit information and saved. Then (step A373), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is not a support hit (step A372; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 22(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepare it (step A382), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0 ( Step A383). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A384) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is a big hit (step A385; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step A381 (step A386 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random value matches the small hit determination value A small hit determination process (step A387) for determining is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381. Then (step A389), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A390).

If it is in a high probability state (step A390; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area. On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (step A390; N), the support hit determination process (step A391).

Then, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is a support hit (step A392; Y), the support hit information is overwritten in the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 and saved. Then (step A393), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is not a support hit (step A392; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area and the support hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23(a) shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit decision value table is provided for each set probability value, and defines an upper limit decision value in a high probability state and an upper limit decision value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A402), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value can be changed according to the probability setting value or probability state. Also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table that defines the lower limit judgment value for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. to set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; N), it is judged whether the probability is high (step A404). And, if the high probability state (step A404; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A405), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407 ). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A404; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A406), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407) . The upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; N), that is, if the game is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A409), and the big hit judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 23(b) shows small hit determination processing (steps A367 and A387) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A411). A small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412). If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set the deviation as the judgment result (step A414) and finish the small hit judgment process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step A414) and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step A415), and finish the small hit judgment process. do.

[Support hit determination process]
FIG. 24 shows support hit determination processing (steps A371 and A391) in the above-described jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this support hit determination process, first, a support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the set probability value is set (step A421). The per support upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, the setting 1 is the most likely to win, and the setting 6 is the least likely to win). is good and vice versa. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. When the probability of a big hit is different for each state, for example, it may be possible to make it easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. . Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁
Further, the range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the range of the support hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the support hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but they may not overlap.

It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit determination value. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the support hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a support hit. By setting the support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value, the support hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value for the support hit is the same value regardless of the probability set value, but the lower limit judgment value for the support hit may be changed according to the probability set value. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value for support hits, a lower limit judgment value for support hits is selected according to the probability set value, in which the lower limit judgment value for support hits is defined for each probability set value. Of course, the support hit upper limit determination value table and the support hit lower limit determination value table may be combined into a support hit determination value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the determination result (step A428) and end the support hit determination process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the support hit was lost. Also, if the target jackpot random number value is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427). The support hit upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the support hit upper limit judgment value table set in step A421 described above.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A428), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process exit.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 25 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (reservation number 1) to load the special symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A434). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A438), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A439). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. . Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A440; Y), a special figure A special symbol random number is loaded from the 1 special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A441). Next, the special figure 1 small winning design table is set (step A442), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A443). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. A corresponding decoration special figure command is prepared (step A455).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A446; Y), a special figure A special symbol random number is loaded from the 1 special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, a special figure 1 per support symbol table is set (step A448), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special figure symbol random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A451), save the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A452), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A455).
Also, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A453), and the stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. (step A454), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A455). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A456), and production command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), the special design 1 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop design setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 26 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2.
In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 special figure random number storage area (reservation number 1) to load the special symbol random number (step A472). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A473), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A474). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A475), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A476). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A477), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A478), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A479). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the performance mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. . Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A480; Y), a special figure 2 Load the special symbol random number from the special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A481). Next, a special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step A482), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design number area (step A483). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is obtained and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop design pattern is saved. A corresponding decoration special figure command is prepared (step A495).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A486; Y), a special figure 2 Load the special symbol random number from the special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A487). Next, the special figure 2 per support symbol table is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special figure symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A491), save the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A492), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A495).
Also, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A493), and the stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. (step A494), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command territory (step A496), production command setting processing (step A497) is done. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), the special design 2 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop design setting process is terminated.
When setting the stop pattern for each result in this way, by using a common special pattern random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. can reduce the burden of control.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 27 shows the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A324, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
First, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A471), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the game state, the number of reservations, the stop symbol pattern number, the remaining support count, and the currently set variation selection table group is acquired. (step A472).
Then, save the acquired variable group selection pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A475), and end the special figure information setting process.

In the variation pattern selection process (A326, A346) performed after this special figure information setting process, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table selected based on the variation group selection pointer acquired here.
That is, the variation pattern is selected based on the game state, the number of suspensions, the stop symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variation selection table group. By selecting a variation pattern in consideration of such factors, it is possible to execute various effects.

For example, the variation selection table group selected according to the variation pattern scenario shown in FIG. is included, and a variation pattern table corresponding to the result is selected from the currently set variation selection table group.
As a result, different variation patterns can be selected for each of big wins, small wins, support wins and losses. For example, the variation pattern table for per support includes only variation patterns including the reach state. Variation patterns for executing the same ready-to-win effect may also be included in the variation pattern table selected in the case of a big win, a small win and a loss, but the result is determined in each case of a big win, a small win, a support hit and a loss. The fluctuation time values are made different in order to make the derivation actions different, and the fluctuation patterns of the respective fluctuation pattern tables are different fluctuation patterns.

Also, even in the same gaming state, it is possible to select different variation patterns depending on the set variation selection table group.
For example, in the chance mode B and the chance mode D shown in FIG. 9(a), both are in the third specific game state ST13 where the number of times of support is 100, but the variation selection table group from the 20th time to the 100th time is different. Therefore, it is possible to perform different presentations by making the tendency of each selected variation pattern different.

Also, even if the number of times of support is the same 100 times, it is possible to change the performance mode by making the variation pattern different depending on the set variation selection table group. For example, depending on the variation selection table group, whether or not to select a variation pattern including the time value for executing the effect to notify the number of support is made different, and whether or not to notify the number of support is selected according to the set variation selection table group. can be made

In addition, in the case of the third specific game state ST13, it is also possible to select a variation pattern considering the number of remaining support times. For example, in the final game in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern including a time value is selected for displaying a result image that notifies the result of the game in the third specific game state ST13. However, the variation pattern is selected considering the result of the final game, and if the result is wrong, the variation pattern including the time value for displaying the result image is selected, but the result is Since no result image is displayed in the case of a big win, a small win or a support win, a variation pattern that does not include a time value for displaying a result image is selected.
Also, it is possible to select a specific variation pattern at any time, such as when the third specific game state ST13 starts, or when a predetermined number of times is reached, or a predetermined number of times before the end.

Further, by enabling the selection of the variation pattern considering the game state, for example, it is possible to select a different variation pattern depending on whether the support hit occurs in the normal game state ST14 or in the third specific game state ST13. Become.
As a result, when the support hit is derived in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13 starts, a variation pattern including a time value for executing the performance peculiar to the start is selected, and the third specific game state ST13 is selected. When the support win is derived in the game state ST13 and the number of times of support is reset, it is possible to select a variation pattern including a time value for executing an effect peculiar to resetting.

In this way, by allowing the game control device 100 to select a variation pattern in consideration of various factors, it is possible to vary the variation time according to the situation and execute various effects. Although the performance control device 300 can also select the performance, it is necessary to follow the variable time selected by the game control device 100 for the variable time, and it is difficult to secure the time specific to the performance to be executed as described above. is.

From the above, a game is controlled in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. game control means (game control device 100) and a normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the game control means has a normal game state and a normal fluctuation rather than the normal game state. It is possible to generate a special game state and a special game state in which winning to the prize winning device 37 is easy, and when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result among the special results, the special game state is generated. A specific game state can be generated, and if the result of the game results in a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the game result can be changed to the special game state. A first lottery random number (jackpot random number) is used to determine which of the result, the specific result, and the losing result, and before the game is executed, the result of the game is divided into the special result and the specific result. , or the deviation result.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

The special results include a first special result (big win) with the operation of the condition device and a second special result (minor win) without the operation of the condition device. One of the first special result, the second special result, the specified result, and the lost result is determined by one first lottery random number.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

Further, the first special result, the second special result, and the specific result each include a plurality of types of results, and the game control means determines that the lottery result by the first lottery random number is the first special result, the second special result, or the specific result. When it is a result, the type of the first special result, the second special result or the specific result will be determined using one second lottery random number (special symbol random number).
Therefore, by using a common second lottery random number even if the results are different, the lottery control can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, the game control means includes a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game, and a variation pattern scenario in which information about transition of the variation pattern table in the specific game state is defined. A variation pattern table defined in a variation pattern scenario is set on the basis of satisfying a predetermined condition in a state, and when a specific result is derived, a variation pattern to be used in a specific game state based on the specific result A scenario is selected based on the type of the specific result selected by the second lottery random number.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state with the second lottery random number, simplify the lottery control, and reduce the control load.
In addition, it becomes possible to select from among a plurality of patterns for the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, game control for controlling the game. Means and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the game control means makes it easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state and the normal game state. A specific game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is one of a plurality of types of specific results, the specific game state can be generated, and a variation pattern that is a game execution mode and a variation pattern scenario in which information about the transition of the variation pattern table in a specific game state is defined, and when a specific result is derived, a specific game state based on the specific result The variation pattern scenario to be used in the analysis will be selected based on the type of specific result.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select from among a plurality of patterns for the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 28 shows the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure fluctuation processing, first, a design stop command corresponding to the fluctuation design determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and the stop symbol pattern is set. When the pattern is the small winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the support winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for the special figure displaying process as the process number (step A605), and save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A606). In addition, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the pattern determination number signal control timer area according to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal Control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 show the special figure displaying process (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the supporter hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the supporter hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of RWM are cleared (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of RWM. And clear the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A707), and if it is a big hit (step A707; Y), it is related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710), and the round A number upper limit table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708). Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operation device operating signal ON, special symbol 1 winning signal ON) regarding the start of the figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) are set to RWM. Save in the test signal output data area (step A709), and set the round number upper limit table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value (“10”, “7” or “2” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A712 ). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, load the decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepare (step A714), and perform the production command setting process (step A715). After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A716), and effect command setting processing (Step A717) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, at step A720, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called definite jackpot, etc.). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is ON at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is set (step A721), and the set jackpot fanfare time is set. Save in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A723). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is cleared (step A724), and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is cleared. The illegality monitoring period outside flag is saved (step A725). Thereafter, a fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 determines the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 38 based on whether the result is a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the device 39 to the open state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and if it is a small hit (step A727; Y), A test signal (for example, a special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned ON) relating to the start of the second special figure variation display game small hit (special 2 small hit) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A730). , time reduction variation number update processing is performed (step A731).
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). saves a test signal (for example, turning on a special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the first special figure variation display game small hit (special figure 1 small hit) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A729), and a process of updating the number of time reduction fluctuations is performed (step A731).

Next, an effect mode information check process (step A732) regarding the setting of the effect mode is performed, and it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A733).
If the special figure is not in high probability (step A733; N), load the decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command area, prepare (step A734), and perform the effect command setting process (step A735). Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A736), effect command setting processing (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Moreover, when it is in the high probability of a special figure (step A733; Y), it transfers to the process of step A738. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of the small win is not allowed in the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag saving area (step A738), and the small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting process (step A738) for shifting to the small winning fanfare medium processing A739) is performed to end the special figure display process.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A740). If it is per support (step A740; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure End the display process.
If the support hit flag 2 is not support hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is support hit (step A741). If it is per support (step A741; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure End the display process.

Moreover, when the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A741; N), time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A744) is performed. Then, an effect mode information check process (step A745) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation number for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the remaining rotation number for effect and the remaining rotation number for switching preparation are set. matches (step A747). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
When the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed, and the special figure display Terminate intermediate processing.

On the other hand, when the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A747; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A748), production command setting processing (step A749) is performed, and special A special figure normal processing shift setting process (step A750) for shifting to the normal figure process is performed, and the process during special figure display ends. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction, etc. from occurring in

[Processing for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations]
FIG. 31 shows the time reduction variation count update process (steps A731 and A744) in the above-described special figure display process. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being supported (step A751). Then, if the general electric power is not being supported (step A751; N), the time reduction variation frequency update process is terminated. Also, if the general electric support is in progress (step A751; Y), the time reduction variation count is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation count has become "0" (step A753) .

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction fluctuation number updating process is terminated. Also, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A753; Y), a signal relating to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A756), save the normal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A757), special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag (step A758). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A759), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A760), and the time reduction variation count update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
FIG. 32 shows the effect mode information check process (steps A732, A745) in the above-described special figure display process. In this presentation mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. .

Also, if the next mode transition information is not an update no code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , determines whether or not the number of rotations remaining for effect has become "0" (step A773). If the effect remaining rotation number is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, and the production remaining rotation number in the RWM. Save it in the area (step A777), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and save it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A782), Command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information check processing is completed. . As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of rotations before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that the transition of the variation selection table group according to the variation pattern scenario described above may also be controlled by this effect mode information check process, or may be controlled by another equivalent process.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 33 shows fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display processing. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turning on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turning on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Turn off the variable time shortening state signal, turn off the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal design 1 variable time shortening state signal, turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save normal pattern low probability & time saving no flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the game state display LED (for example, the third game state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state is extinguished. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the time saving state A time-reduction variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the process shift setting process (step A739) during small hit fanfare in the process during special figure display described above. In this small winning fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small winning fanfare mid-process is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A811). A812).
Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal regarding the start of a small win (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output with a big win + a small win). ) is saved in the external information output data area (step A814).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for major winning openings (step A816).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the process transition setting process during small win fanfare is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-described special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction variation frequency area (step A821), and the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is external information Save in the output data area (step A822). That is, when the support winning pattern stops, only a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is output as the external information signal.
Then, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A824), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure gate mode flag area (step A825), and maintain the probability state flag In order to have time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of variation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting (step A904) in the jackpot end processing is performed. By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the presentation mode transition information, the variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group, is also acquired.
That is, in the case of a support hit, a stop pattern, which is a type of support hit, is selected by a special symbol random number, and production mode transition information is selected based on the stop design to select a variation pattern scenario. Become.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that has become a support hit is acquired. , save in the effect mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that has become a support hit, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode that is set is acquired, and is saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that has become a support hit. Next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that became a support hit. .

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), the command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A835), and effect command setting processing (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is further included in any of "high probability/time saving" and "low probability/time saving". Although it is not used in this process, there are a number of other commands that include "high probability, no time saving", "low probability, no time saving", and further production mode information.
Next, prepare a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number (step A837), perform production command setting processing (step A838), and issue a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number. Preparations are made (step A839), and effect command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process (steps A743, A750) in the above-described special figure display process. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" for special figure normal processing is set as a processing number (step A851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A852). .
Then, the information in the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A854), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process is completed. .

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 37 shows the jackpot ending process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot end processing, first, the probability fluctuation determination data set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is set when the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data (step A901).
If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) is acquired (step A905). The performance mode transition information also includes a variation pattern scenario that is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the production mode and management of the variable selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired. is saved in the effect mode number area (step A906). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation speed of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the production mode set after the special game state is shifted to the next mode. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on the special figure variation display game being executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state.

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), the command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A910), and effect command setting processing (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of "high probability / time saving", "high probability / no time saving", "low probability / time saving". . Although not used in this process, there are several other commands that include information on the production mode in addition to "low probability / no time saving".
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A912), and an effect command setting process (step A913) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A914), and effect command setting processing (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, a signal related to the end of the big win (for example, turn off the signal for big win 1, turn off the signal for big win 3, turn off the signal for big win 4) is saved in the external information output data area (step A918), and save the signal related to the end of the big win (for example, , condition device operating signal OFF, character continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 win signal OFF, special symbol 2 win signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A921), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot end processing is completed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 38(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Since the signal relating to the start of time saving is output from the middle of the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal design 1 high probability state signal ON, normal design 1 fluctuation time The shortened state signal is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A933), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A934), special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure low probability & time saving flag (step A935). After that, the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction variation frequency region (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (for example, 100) in the time-saving number-of-time area, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 38(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of a high probability (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal regarding the start of the high probability is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the start of high probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening The state signal is turned ON, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is turned ON, the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON, and the normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A942). ).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A943), save the high probability & time saving flag in the general game mode flag area (step A944), special game mode flag area To save the special figure high probability & time saving flag (step A945). After that, the time shortening variation count area is cleared (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until derivation of the next special result mode. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big hit, the right-handed hit is not set in the big hit end setting process 2.
That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100, over a predetermined period of time, normal variable winning device 37 to extend the period of the open state specific game state (time saving state) can be generated specific game It constitutes state generation control means.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 39 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or cross key 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the cross key 29, processing for changing the content of performance, etc. is performed. .

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting changeable ranges of LED and liquid crystal brightness, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change LED and liquid crystal brightness, volume, and the like (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 sec), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 sec) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the sound output from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18 including the display plate 350, etc. is performed. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, board effect setting processing (step C20) for controlling effect is performed, and WDT is cleared. It returns to the processing (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 40 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during a big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during a small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Further, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pattern-based command (step C239; Y), the pattern-based command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided.
In the first decoration game display section 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information variably in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

In the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 . , then stop and display the result. The identification information (small symbols) relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the second decoration game display portion 82 .

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
Decoration special figure fluctuation display game in which the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game) , the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds to the first start memory one-on-one, and the leftmost decoration special figure start memory display is stored first. It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. game), the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds one-to-one with the second start memory, and the second start in which the leftmost decoration special figure start memory display is stored first It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prediction such as the variation pattern can be suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display portion 83 is shifted to the in-execution memory display portion 84 . Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, the first starting memory number display portion 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and the second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number) A second start memory number display portion 85b for displaying is provided.

FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 show a case of executing a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 42 is an example of display on the display device 41, and FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart.
When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t61), as shown in FIGS. The game result is stopped and displayed on the decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 ) disappears. In FIG. 42(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 4 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state.

Also, in FIG. 42(a), the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display section 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 . Here, the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "support hit A", and that effect , It is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display. That is, the number of times of support given is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display.

Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "346".
Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 4 and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t62). After that, when the second predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Effect of displaying to shift the display to the in-execution memory display section 84) is executed, and the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Here, since a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays are displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is changed to the running memory display by the transition effect. While moving to the part 84, the decoration special figure start memory display other than the left end of the standby memory display part 83 is shifted to the left in the memory display part 83 during standby.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t63), as shown in FIGS. The fluctuation display of starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIGS. The reach state in which the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the variable display area is established, and the reach fluctuation starts (t64).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(d) and 43, on the display device 41, a battle effect in which the friendly character fights the enemy character starts (t65). At the start of the battle effect, in order to secure a battle effect display portion for displaying the battle effect within the display area of the display device 41, the left movement display area of the first decoration game display portion 81 is changed to the display area of the display device 41. , the right changing display area of the first decoration game display unit 81 moves to the right end of the display area of the display device 41, and the visibility of the middle changing display area is lowered and becomes invisible. . That is, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area is lowered by the specific effect display. Further, the standby storage display section 83 and the execution storage display section 84 are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(e), the result of the battle presentation is reported. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle presentation is "tie". On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "big hit", the result of the battle presentation is "winning of the ally character", and the result of the special figure variation display game being performed is "loss". , the result of the battle effect is "losing of the ally character".

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(f), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display section 81. FIG. As a result, the visibility of the middle fluctuation display area is restored. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t66), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game result is stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 memory display) disappears. Here, since the game result is "supporter win A", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "supporter win A". It is "434".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 42(g) and 43, when the stop display time starts (t66), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win A", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win A" is 20 times. An effect of displaying "support 20 times" on the number display section 86) is executed. On the other hand, if the game result is "support win B", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times. A performance is performed. In addition, when the game result is "support win C", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times. executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42(g), when the stop display time starts (t66), the standby memory display portion 83 and the running memory display portion 84 reappear.

Here, since the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 3, and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t67). When the variable time starts (t67), as shown in FIG. 43, the game shifts to the chance mode. Specifically, in the case of the normal game state ST14, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. Also, in the case of the first specific game state ST11, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the second specific game state ST12.

In this embodiment, the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation configured not to display. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the chance mode (t67), the main variation switches from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation display game, so as shown in FIGS. The decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 disappears.
Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, that is, when it is not in the chance mode (during general electric support), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit during execution Although it is possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory in 84, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is hidden. In addition, when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13, that is, when the chance mode is in progress (during general electricity support), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit during execution Although it is possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory in 84, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is hidden.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 42(h), the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a on the display device 41 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t68), as shown in FIGS. 42(i) and 43, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The fluctuation display of starts.
When the variable display starts (t68), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. Here, the number of times of support granted this time is 20, and the first game (first game) is being executed after the chance mode (general electric support) has started, so as shown in FIG. At the same time, an effect for notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 times (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times left" on the number of times of support display section 86) is executed.

Also, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, an effect is executed to notify that the game will enter the chance mode, and then an effect is executed to notify that the chance mode is in progress. During the chance mode (during general electric support), the battle production started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "support hit" is continued, that is, the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit" Since the game ends in a draw and the battle continues without a settlement, in FIGS. 42(i) and (j), as an effect to notify that the chance mode is on, a effect to display "battle mode" is displayed. It is running. As a result, it is possible to connect the effects before and after the transition to the chance mode.
Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed hitting (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed hit →" (see FIGS. 42(i) and (j)). ) starts.

Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. In the device 41, a new decoration special figure start memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure start memory displays of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. .
Also, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the battle mode), a battle effect is executed and the number of support times is changed (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Each time the support count is changed, the number of allied characters may be increased or decreased, or the level of the allied characters may be increased or decreased. Specifically, for example, if the support count after the change is less than the support count before the change, the number of allied characters is maintained (or reduced) so that the support count after the change is equal to the support count before the change. If it is more than the number of times, the number of ally characters may be increased as shown in FIG. 42(k), for example.

In addition, the identification information (decorative identification information) that constitutes the support per pattern may be composed only of general patterns (designs 1 to 9), or may be composed of general patterns and special patterns (special patterns for support). It may be composed of, or may be composed only of special symbols. That is, the support winning symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. As shown, it may be composed of general symbols and special symbols, or may be composed only of special symbols. Further, the support winning symbols stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. It may consist of a general pattern and a special pattern, or may consist of only a special pattern.

In this embodiment, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game.
FIGS. 44 to 48 show a case where the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "per support" is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game. 44 to 47 are examples of displays on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 48 is an example of a timing chart.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. The game result is stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 44(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "off".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 2, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Start, in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When the game ball wins into the starting prize winning port 36 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , a new decoration special figure start memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure start memory displays in the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, collective display In the device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes. Here, the new decoration special figure starting memory display is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 .

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. The game result is stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 81 and the display of the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "235", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 2, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Start, in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t71), as shown in FIGS. The game result is stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 memory display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "625", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 1, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t72). After that, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. , the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes. Here, since the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, even if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the transition effect (decoration special Effect of displaying to shift the figure start memory display) is not executed.

Then, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t73), as shown in FIGS. The variable display of the display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the reach variation starts in the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 (t74), and the battle effect is performed in the display device 41. starts (t75), and the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle effect is "tie".

Next, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decoration game display section 81. FIG. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t76), as shown in FIG. The game result is statically displayed on the game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, and the variable display is terminated on the collective display device 50, and the game result is statically displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. In this case, since the game result is "supporter win A", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "supporter win A". It is "434", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "supporting A".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(c) and 48, when the stop display time starts (t76), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win A", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win A" is 20 times. An effect of displaying "20 times remaining" on the number display section 86) is executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 45(c), when the stop display time starts (t76), the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 that were hidden at the start of the battle effect reappear.
Here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t77). When the variable time starts (t77), as shown in FIG. 48, the game shifts to the chance mode.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t78), as shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 48, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The variable display of starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts.

When the variable display starts (t78), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. Here, the number of times of support given this time is 20 times, and the first game (first game) is being executed after the chance mode (general electric support) has started, so FIG. 45 (d), (e) ), an effect for notifying that the number of remaining support times is 19 (for example, an effect for displaying "19 times remaining" on the support time display unit 86) is executed.
Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed hitting (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed hit →" (see FIGS. 45(d) and (e)). ) starts.

Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode informing effect, first, as shown in FIG. 45(d), an effect informing that the chance mode will be entered (for example, an effect of displaying a "chance mode entry screen") is executed. As shown in FIG. 45(e), an effect (for example, an effect of displaying a "chance mode screen") is executed to inform that the player is in the chance mode. Here, the first decoration game display portion 81 (large pattern) is hidden by the chance mode entering screen or the chance mode in-progress screen and the visibility is lowered, but the visibility is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entry screen and the chance mode in-progress screen may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the first decoration game display section 81 so as not to reduce the visibility, or the chance mode entry screen and The first decorative game display section 81 may be displayed on the near side of the screen during the chance mode so as not to lower the visibility.

In this embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display is hidden at the start of the battle production and redisplayed at the time of design determination. When the pending change effect is executed in the standby memory display part 83 before it is hidden, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display part 83 is hidden at the start of the battle effect and the pattern. When redisplayed at the time of confirmation, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in 45(f) to 45(j), it may be re-displayed while the pending change effect is being executed.

Specifically, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 45 (a) and the decoration special figure start memory at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. The display is a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the same starting memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 45 (a)), while it is a normal display mode at the time of re-display (Fig. 45 (c)) . That is, it reappears in a state in which the display mode has been reset.
Also, in FIG. 45(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 45(h) , It is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 45(f)), and is also in the specific display mode when re-displaying (Fig. 45(h)).

Further, when re-displaying with the pending change effect being executed, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of re-display is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e), or may be different from the rendering mode before non-display, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) to (e).
Specifically, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. The display is a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the same starting memory. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is the same before non-display (Fig. 45(f)) and at the time of re-display (Fig. 45(h)). In other words, it reappears in a state in which the display mode before non-display (before the start of the battle effect) is inherited.
Also, in FIG. 46(a), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 46(c) , It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. Of the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is before non-display (Fig. 46 (a)) and when re-displaying (Fig. 46 (c)), but the display mode (here, shape) different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result is different before non-display (Fig. 46(a)) and during re-display (Fig. 46 (c)) is different.

The battle production is not only started during the execution of the special figure variation display game with the result of "support hit", but also starts during the execution of the special figure variation display game with the result other than "support hit". is possible, but if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game that was being executed at the start of the battle production is "support hit" and if it is not "support hit", whether or not there is a pending change effect at the time of reappearance Alternatively, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of reappearance may be changed.
Specifically, for example, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden during the execution of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle production) and at the start of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game ( When the pattern is confirmed), and if the pending change effect is executed in the standby storage display unit 83 before it is hidden, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "support If "hit", as shown in FIGS. 45(a) to (e), it is displayed again without executing the pending change effect, and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "big hit", FIG. 46 ( Similar to a) to (e), redisplay in the state where the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is different from before non-display), and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "missing", FIG. 45 ( As in f) to (j), it may be redisplayed in a state where the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is the same as before non-display).

Further, in the present embodiment, only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular variation is configured not to display, but is not limited to this. For example, the standby memory display unit 83 can display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation, and the running memory display unit 84 only displays the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation. Instead, it may be possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation.
In that case, when the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84 is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation, for example, in FIG. 47 (a) ~ (e) As shown in FIG. 47, the pending change effect may be executed in the running memory display unit 84. For example, as shown in FIGS. You may choose not to execute it.

It should be noted that the pending change effect to be executed in the standby memory display unit 83, by displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 in a specific display mode, the decoration special figure start memory It is a production that suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the display and the result of the prediction such as the fluctuation pattern.
In addition, the pending change effect executed in the running memory display unit 84 is displayed by displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84 in a specific display mode. It is an effect that suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the display (the special figure fluctuation display game currently being executed) and the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 47 (c), and the decorative special figure starting memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. Is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same special figure fluctuation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is the same before moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (c)) and after moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (e)). ing. In other words, the transition is made to the in-execution storage display section 84 in a state in which the display mode before the transition is inherited.
The display mode after transitioning to the in-execution storage display section 84 may be a display mode different from the display mode before transition. Specifically, for example, among the display modes of the decoration special figure starting memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is taken over even after the transition, suggesting the look-ahead result A display mode (for example, a shape) different from the display mode for the transition may be different before and after the transition.

Also, in FIG. 47(h), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. 47(j) are the same It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (h)), while after moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (j)) has a normal display mode. That is, the display mode is reset and the process is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84 .

In addition, since only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 is the first start memory In the case of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to, the decoration special figure start memory display is hidden when the chance mode starts, and reappears when the chance mode ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, when the first starting memory generated before the chance mode starts is not digested during the chance mode, the pending change effect for the first starting memory is performed before the chance mode starts. If it has been executed, when the chance mode ends, it may reappear with the display mode taken over before the start of the battle effect.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 45(d), (i), 46(d), 47(d), and (i), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit 84 during execution display the chance mode entry screen. hidden in, but not limited to. Specifically, for example, the screen for entering the chance mode has a size that does not overlap the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 (including the decoration special figure start memory display) (for example, the same size as the chance mode screen) , or a standby storage display section 83 and an execution storage display section 84 may be displayed on the near side of the screen for entering the chance mode.
Further, when the decoration special figure variation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 is a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular variation, it is stored during standby. The decoration special figure start memory display of the display unit 83 (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation) may be hidden. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 45(a), (f), FIG. 46(a), FIG. Decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) may be hidden.

In the example shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is " It is a result mode of "missing", and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is a result mode of "missing". Therefore, in a state in which the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern (loose pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the special figure 2 Variation display of the variation display game (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (first decoration game display unit 81 and second decoration Variable display on the game display unit 82) is started.
Of course, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 match If not, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

The special effect performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" is not limited to the battle effect, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, in addition to (or in place of) the battle effect during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win", a pseudo continuous effect that repeats the variation display of the large symbols may be executed. .
FIG. 50 shows an example of executing a pseudo-continuous effect as a special effect performed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support win C". Since FIG. 50(a) shows the same state as FIG. 45(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special-figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the pseudo-continuous effect is started in the first decorative game display section 81 after the start of the variation display. When the pseudo-continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 50(b), first, a support number suggesting special symbol and general symbol (here, "4") suggesting the number of support to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support win C", the number of times of support actually given is 1000 times, but here, the number of times of support given is less than the number of times of support actually given. A special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support that suggests that it will be temporarily stopped is displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be provided is 20 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the suggested number of times is displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.
Then, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the re-variation display of the large pattern starts, and then, as shown in FIG. A symbol (here, "5") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be added is 80 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50( e ), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(e), the re-variation display of the large pattern starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A symbol (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be added is 900 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(g), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(g), the re-varying display of the large symbols is started, and then, as shown in FIG. , the pseudo continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 stop displaying the game result. In this case, since the game result is "support win C", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "support win C". It is "656".

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(i), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and first, the number of support to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win C", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times. Effect of displaying "Support 1000 times!"
Also, here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and The decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time starts, the game shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 50(j).

In FIG. 50, the case of executing a pseudo-continuous effect during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit" was illustrated, but the pseudo continuous effect is a special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "support hit". It can also be executed during the game. The same applies to special effects (for example, battle effects) other than the pseudo-continuous effects.
Also, in FIG. 50, the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit C" is illustrated, but the pseudo-continuous effect is a special figure in which the result is "support hit A". It can be executed during a variable display game, and it is also possible to execute it during a special figure variable display game in which the result is "support hit B".

In the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit A", for example, FIGS. 50(d) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the large symbols change again. The display starts, after which the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("Sapo hit A" result mode is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82). "434") is stopped, and the game shifts to the chance mode.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", for example, FIGS. 50(f) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the large symbols change again. The display starts, then, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. After that, the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("support hit B" result mode is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82). "545") is stopped, and the mode shifts to the chance mode.

In FIGS. 50(b), (e), and (f), the special symbol for suggesting the number of support is temporarily stopped and displayed in the medium variation display area of the first decorative game display section 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbols for suggesting the number of times of support may be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.
Further, the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of times of support initially suggested (the number of times of support that is less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Of course, the special effect (for example, battle effect, pseudo-continuous effect) performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "sapo hit" is only when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11. Instead, it can be executed also when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13. In other words, the special effect can be executed regardless of whether the chance mode is in progress (general electric support is in progress).

Also, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is "support hit" starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified, but the stop display time The number of times of support notified inside may be different from the number of times of support actually provided. Specifically, for example, during the stop display time, it is notified that the number of support times that is less than the number of support actually given is given, and an additional effect that adds the number of support times during the chance mode is executed. good.
FIG. 51 shows an example of an additional effect performed after the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit C". Since FIG. 51(a) shows the same state as FIG. 45(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIG. When the variation time of the figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, since the game result is "supporter win C", the display device 41 displays "767" as the supporter win symbol, which is common to "supporter win A", "supporter win B", and "supporter win C". ” is displayed temporarily or stopped. Of course, not only when the game result is "supporter hit C", but also when the game result is "supporter hit A" or "supporter win B", the result common to each "supporter win" as a supporter win symbol It is possible to temporarily stop display or stop display of the mode "767".

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(c), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and first, the number of support to be provided is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win C" and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times, but it is notified that the number of times of support given is smaller than the number of times of support actually given. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying “20 remaining times” on the number-of-supports display unit 86) is being executed.
Also, here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and The decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time starts, it shifts to the chance mode.

When the game shifts to the chance mode, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode informing effect, first, as shown in FIG. 51(d), an effect for informing that the chance mode will be entered (for example, an effect for displaying a "chance mode entering screen") is executed, and then the effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 51(e), an effect for informing that the player is in the chance mode (for example, an effect for displaying a "chance mode screen") is executed.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIGS. 51 (f) and (g) , In the display device 41, a new decoration special figure starting memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure starting memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 85b Change.

Here, the number of times of support to be added is displayed in the new decoration special figure start memory display. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(h), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is displayed to transition) When the performance) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution is added to the number of times displayed in the number of times of support display part 86.例文帳に追加Here, since "80" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to be shifted to the in-execution memory display section 84, "80 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. - 特許庁

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is displayed to transition) When performance) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution is added to the number of times displayed in the number of times of support display part 86.例文帳に追加Here, since "900" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to be shifted to the memory display unit 84 during execution, "900 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display unit 86. - 特許庁In addition, the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed as "900" is a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect for the starting memory corresponding to the decoration special figure starting memory display is executed.

Note that the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" or "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the number of times of support notified before the additional effect (the number of times of support that is smaller than the number of times of support actually provided) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (here, the starting memory generated in FIG. 51 (f)) that is not subject to the pending change effect, and the starting memory that is the target of the pending change effect (Here, the starting memory generated in FIG. 51 (g)) and the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the support number of times to be added to both can be displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is not subject to the pending change production.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "lost" and the start memory of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "jackpot" are supported. It was possible to display the number of supports to be added to both the decorative special figure start memory display and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "support hit". , but not limited to. For example, the number of supports to be added may be displayed only on the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "missing".

For example, if it is possible to display the number of supports to be added only in the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the loss variation (special figure variation display game in which the result is "miss"), the display of the number of support Since the presence or absence of a change suggests whether or not it is a losing change, it is possible for the player to know that the game result is a "lose" even before the losing change starts, and the interest of the losing change is increased. It is likely to decline.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is "lost" and the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" are displayed. By making it possible to display the number of supports to be added to both the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "per support", Whether or not the number of times of support is displayed does not indicate whether or not there is a loss variation, so the interest in the loss variation can be improved.

In FIG. 51, the case of executing the additional production during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit" was illustrated, but the additional production is "support hit". It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode entered upon completion of a particular special figure 1 variable display game.
In addition, in FIG. 51, the case of executing the additional production during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit C" is illustrated, but the additional production is executed when the result is "support hit It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that is A", and the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit B". It is also possible to run inside

In addition, in FIG. 51(b), the first decoration game display section 81 temporarily stops displaying "767", which is a result mode common to each "support winning", and in FIG. 51(c), the first decoration game Although "767", which is a result mode common to each "support win", is stop-displayed on the display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "supporter winning C", "656", which is the result mode of "supporter winning C", is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81, and the first decoration game display unit 81 81 and the second decorative game display portion 82 may stop and display "656", which is the result mode of "support win C".
For example, when "656", which is a result mode unique to "support win C", is temporarily stopped or stopped, the player can grasp the number of times of support actually given before the additional effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to do so, there is a possibility that the interest of the additional performance may decrease. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 51, by temporarily stopping or stopping the common result mode for each "supporting hit", the additional effect is actually given at the stage before execution. Since it is possible to obscure the number of times the support is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the additional production.

Next, an example of game effects will be described. 52 to 54 show examples of game effects, and FIG. 55 shows changes in the visibility of the board effect device 44, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, and the middle fluctuation display area 81b. rice field. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the display on the display device 41, the board presentation device 44 movable forward of the display device 41, and the display on the display board 350 arranged to cover the front surface of the game board 30 are combined. It is possible to execute the production that was made.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the previous special figure variation display game is finished, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Since the board effect device 44 is also at the initial position, the visibility of the identification information of each variable display area including the board effect device 44, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, and the middle variable display region 81b is high. state (t100 in FIG. 55).
When the next special figure variation display game is started from this state, as shown in FIG. , the variable display of the identification information is started. In addition, the variable display of the identification information also starts on the second decoration game display section 82 . Since the identification information is variably displayed, the visibility of the identification information in each variable display area including the middle variable display area 81b is lowered (t101 in FIG. 55).
That is, the variable display of identification information changes the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display.

As shown in FIGS. 52(c) and (d), in this example, after the start of the variable display, the board effect device 44 moves from the initial position toward the operation position on the center side of the display area. In this process, the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b is gradually hidden, and the visibility is gradually lowered. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(e), the action of the board effect device 44 returning to the initial position gradually improves the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b (from t102 to t103 in FIG. 55).

After that, the display on the display panel 350 is performed as shown in FIG. 52(f). By performing the display on the display board 350, the visibility of the first decoration game display portion 81, the second decoration game display portion 82, the memory display portion 83 during execution, and the memory display portion 84 during execution, which overlap with the display, is lowered. . Here, the display on the display board 350 is a display that can see through the display device 41 and the board effect device 44 positioned behind, and the identification information displayed in the middle fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44 is visually recognized. The degree of decrease is lower than that of the decrease in sex (from t104 to t105 in FIG. 55).

Then, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the ready-to-win state is reached, and here again, the board effect device 44 is operating as shown in FIG. 52(h). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lowered (from t106 to t107 in FIG. 55). This effect is effected by changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by the board effect device 44. - 特許庁
In addition, as shown in FIG. 52(i), the display is performed on the display panel 350, and the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is further reduced (from t107 to t108 in FIG. 55). This effect is effected by changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by the display of the display board 350 .
In addition, since the display on the display board 350 overlaps with the board effect device 44, the second decoration game display section 82, and the standby memory display section 83, the visibility of these also decreases, but they overlap compared to the middle fluctuation display area 81b. Since the area is small, the decrease in visibility is small.

That is, in the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the visibility of the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is the lowest, and the visibility of the board effect device 44, the second decoration game display section 82 and the standby memory display section 83 are the lowest. , and the visibility of the in-execution memory display section 84 is higher in this order, and there is a difference in the visibility between them.
As a result, the visibility of the second decoration game display section 82 is ensured even in a situation in which the medium-variation display area 81b and the board presentation device 44, which are the parts that the player pays the most attention to, are fully exhibited. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and by ensuring the visibility of the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, it is easy to grasp the information of the starting memory. can be
In addition to making a difference in visibility depending on the size of the area where the display on the display panel 350 overlaps, it is also possible to make a difference in visibility depending on the degree of transparency of the display on the display panel 350 . For example, the transparency of the portion overlapping the second decoration game display portion 82 and the standby memory display portion 83 may be set higher than the transparency of the portion overlapping the medium fluctuation display area 81b and the board effect device 44.

In this way, the visibility of the identification information of the middle variable display area 81b forming a predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 is changed between the board effect device 44 and the display on the display plate 350, thereby providing various effects. can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, although the degree of expectation for a special result can be suggested by the display color and display content of the display board 350, the running memory display section 84, the second decoration game display section 82, and the standby memory display section 83 are visually recognized. Therefore, even if the visibility of the first decoration game display section 81 is lowered, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game and the degree of expectation at the same time.

After that, the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, and the visibility of the display device 41 including the medium fluctuation display area 81b recovers (t109 in FIG. 55). Then, it develops into the SP reach state, and the identification information temporarily stops in the middle fluctuation display area 81b as shown in FIG. 52(j). Due to the temporary stop, the visibility of the identification information in the middle fluctuation display area 81b is improved compared to the state where the display is changed at high speed (t110 in FIG. 55). Also, during execution of the SP reach, the standby storage display section 83 and the execution storage display section 84 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in this SP ready-to-win effect, an effect is performed in which identification information is transformed into different identification information. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the shape of the identification information begins to deform, and as shown in FIG. 53(b), the identification information is deformed so as to be compressed from the left and right. The visibility of the area 81b is reduced. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53(c) and 53(d), the visibility of the middle variation display area 81b improves as the amount of deformation decreases (from t111 to t112 in FIG. 55). That is, the effect of transforming the identification information is the first effect of changing the visibility of the display by changing the display on the display device 41 .
Also, the first effect here does not continue the state of low visibility as in variable display, but is a effect of periodically changing between a high visibility state and a low visibility state.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f), the board rendering device 44 operates as shown in FIGS. An effect is being performed and the visibility is further reduced (from t113 to t115 in FIG. 55). This production is a second production in which the visibility of the display on the display device 41 is changed by operating the board production device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap the display device 41 .
The execution timing of the second effect here is started in a state where the visibility is the lowest in the first effect in which the visibility changes periodically. Visibility is greatly reduced by lowering the visibility due to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53(i), the display on the display panel 350 is performed while the board effect device 44 is operating, and the visibility is further reduced (t115 to t116 in FIG. 55). This effect constitutes a third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350 .
In the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b has the lowest visibility due to a combination of the deformation, the overlap of the board effect device 44, and the overlap of the display on the display board 350. The visibility increases in the order of the visibility of the effect device 44 and the visibility of the second decoration game display section 82, and there is a difference in visibility between these.

As shown in FIG. 53(j), when the display on the display board 350 is completed, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position (t117 in FIG. 55), and enters the reach state as shown in FIG. 54(a). The identification information that is present temporarily stops (t118 in FIG. 55). In this example, the result is a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 54(b), the board effect device 44 operates and the display on the display board 350 is performed to deterministically inform that a special result will be derived. (t118 to t121 in FIG. 55).
After that, the temporary stop is finished, the variable display is stopped, and the stop display time is reached, and as shown in FIG. A stop display is displayed (t122 in FIG. 55). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the middle variation display area 81b is the highest. Further, during the stop display time, the display of the memory-in-waiting display section 83 and the memory-in-execution display section 84 is resumed.

When the stop display time ends, the special game state is started. As shown in FIG. 54(d), in the fanfare state, the second decoration game display section 82, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, the first start memory number display section 85a, and the second start memory number display section are displayed. The display of 85b ends (t123 in FIG. 55).
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 54(e) and 54(f), the board effect device 44 is operating during the fanfare effect, and the visibility of the identification information in the middle fluctuation display area 81b is reduced (t124 in FIG. 55). from t127). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54(g), the display is performed on the display panel 350 and the visibility is lowered (from t125 to t126 in FIG. 55).
After that, as shown in FIG. 54(h), the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, the display on the first decoration game display section 81 also ends, and the display on the display board 350 ends. ), a round game is started (t128 in FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54(i), in the round game, a round number display 87a indicating the number of rounds, a type display 87b indicating the type of bonus, a special result display 87c indicating the derived special result, and the number of won prize balls are displayed. Acquisition number display 87d shown is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 54(j), the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed even during the round game. And part or all of the acquisition number display 87 d changes in visibility depending on the display of the board effect device 44 or the display board 350 . Of course, only one of the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed.

When the operation of the board presentation device 44 and the display of the display plate 350 are performed during the special game state, it is notified that the special game state more advantageous to the player than the contents of the special game state initially notified will be executed. There is a case of so-called promotion production.
For example, during the fanfare production as shown in FIGS. 54(e) to (g), or during the round as shown in FIG. can be considered.
In this case, the display of the result mode on the first decoration game display section 81 shown in FIG. 54(g) and the visibility of the special result display 87c shown in FIG. , it is possible to effectively produce a process in which the first decoration game display portion 81 and the special result display 87c change to displays that are advantageous to the player.

As described above, by changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display, and by operating the board effect device 44 so as to overlap the display device 41, the display of the display device 41 is changed. A second effect of changing the visibility and a third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350 are executed in combination. Therefore, the visibility of the display device 41 can be changed in multiple stages, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display panel 350 are performed so that the degree of visibility of the plurality of types of display on each part of the display device 41 is different, thereby enhancing the effect of rendering. In addition, visibility can be ensured for necessary display.
Also, the board rendering device 44 is opaque, and the display on the display plate 350 is translucent, so that the degree of deterioration of visibility is different, so that the performance can be varied with different tastes.

In addition, a first effect of changing the visibility of the medium-variation display area 81b by deformation or the like, a second effect of changing the visibility of the medium-variation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and the display of the display board 350 The third effects for changing the visibility of the board effect device 44 can be executed independently, or can be executed in arbitrary combinations.

Further, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b may be kept unchanged by executing the third effect.
In the above example, since the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b is not completely hidden by the board effect device 44, the visible part of the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81 is visually recognized by displaying the display board 350. However, by completely hiding the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81 changes even if the display board 350 is displayed. you can avoid it.
In addition, by hiding the medium-variation display area 81 and the first decoration game display section 81 in advance when the display board 350 is displayed, the medium-variation display area 81 can be visually recognized even when the display board 350 is displayed. You can keep your gender from changing.

It should be noted that the volume emitted from the speaker 19 when the second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by operating the board effect device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap the display device 41 is executed. is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect. As a result, the effect is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect.
In the above example, during execution of the special figure variation display game, the closer the end of the special figure variation display game is, the louder the sound volume is. The volume is the lowest before reaching the reach state (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55), and when the reach state occurs (t106 to t109 in FIG. 55), during the SP reach (t114 to t117 in FIG. 55), the variable display stops. The volume increases in order immediately before (from t118 to t121 in FIG. 55). As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the player's sense of expectation toward the derivation of the result, and to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the volume during operation of the board effect device 44 in the special game state (from t124 to t127 in FIG. 55) is the same volume as during the SP reach.

In addition, regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 when the third effect of performing a predetermined display on the display board 350 is performed, before the occurrence of the SP reach (Fig. 55 t102 to t103, t106 to t109) and after SP reach occurs (t114 to t117, t118 to t121 in FIG. 55). As a result, the effect is different depending on whether or not the SP reach occurs.
In the above example, the LED is extinguished before the occurrence of the SP reach, and after the occurrence of the SP reach, the light emission mode continues the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second effect, or the light emission mode suggests the degree of expectation for a special result. I am trying to It should be noted that, even during the special game state, the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second effect is continued.

When a predetermined display is being performed on the display board 350, the other LEDs are turned off so that the display on the display board 350 becomes conspicuous, suggesting the occurrence of SP reach. You can increase the effect.
In addition, after the occurrence of the SP reach, the image of the display device 41 and other LEDs are illuminated to produce the SP reach effect. , can improve the interest of the game.

The volume during execution of the second effect is not limited to the order described above. For example, the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, the higher the volume may be, or the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b is. It is also possible to make the volume smaller as much as possible.
Also, regarding the volume during the execution of the third effect, for example, the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, the higher the volume. It may be made smaller.

Furthermore, the sound volume may differ between when the second effect and the third effect are combined and when they are not combined.
For example, in a situation where it is possible to select either the case where the second effect and the third effect are combined at the same timing, or the case where the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, the second effect and the third effect may be set such that the sound volume becomes louder when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone. Conversely, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the sound volume may be made smaller than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to provide different effects depending on whether or not the effects are combined, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, when the volume is the lowest (for example, before reaching the reach state (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55)), the volume is the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game The sound volume may be smaller than that when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, when the volume is the largest (for example, during SP reach (t114 to t117 in FIG. 55)), the volume is the second during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game The sound volume may be made smaller than when the effect or the third effect is executed alone.

The light emission mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during the execution of the third effect is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set.
In addition, the light emitting mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during execution of the second effect may also be changed according to the execution timing of the effect. For example, before the occurrence of SP reach and after occurrence of SP reach may be different.

Furthermore, the light emission mode may be different between when the second effect and the third effect are combined and when they are not combined.
For example, in a situation where it is possible to select either the case where the second effect and the third effect are combined at the same timing, or the case where the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, the second effect and the third effect The light emission intensity of the LED may be higher when the second effect or the third effect is performed alone than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone. Conversely, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be lower than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to provide different effects depending on whether or not the effects are combined, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the light emission intensity when the light emission intensity of the LED is the lowest is the second during the execution of the special figure variation display game The emission intensity of the LED may be lower than when the effect or the third effect is executed alone.
In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity when the light emission intensity of the LED is the highest is the second effect or the third effect performed alone during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. It may be made smaller than the emission intensity of the LED in the case.

Further, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be changed according to the volume level.
For example, the higher the volume, the higher the emission intensity of the LED, or the higher the volume, the lower the emission intensity of the LED.

The execution timing of the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display board 350 is not limited to the above example and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, the method for reducing the visibility of the identification information in the medium-variation display area 81b is not limited to the method described above, and other methods may be used. For example, the visibility may be lowered by inverting the identification information vertically or horizontally, or the visibility may be lowered by changing the color, brightness, saturation, or transparency of the identification information. The visibility may be lowered by superimposing the images of .

In addition, as the first effect, as shown in FIG. 52(b), a variable display effect is included in which the identification information is operated in the same manner in a plurality of variable display areas with the start of the special figure variable display game. However, this effect may not be included in the first effect.
For example, as shown in FIG. 52(g), in a situation where the operating states of the identification information are different in a plurality of variable display areas and there is a difference in visibility, the effect that reduces the visibility of the identification information may be set as the first effect. You can do it. Also, the first effect may be the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information after the start of the ready-to-win state.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 52(b), with the start of the special figure variation display game, the visibility of the identification information is reduced by changes other than making the identification information operate in the same way in a plurality of variation display areas. may be used as the first production.

Further, in the above example, the visibility of the identification information in the middle fluctuation display area 81b is reduced, but the visibility of the identification information in the left fluctuation display area 81a and the right fluctuation display area 81c may be reduced. . Furthermore, the visibility may be reduced for images other than the identification information, such as background images, effect images, images indicating the firing direction, and the like.
In addition, reducing the visibility can be said to make it difficult to see, and these states may include making it invisible.
In addition, reducing the visibility includes covering a part or the whole of an object so that it cannot be seen, or covering a part or the whole of the object with an object or an image having low translucency.

Further, the operation and shape of the board rendering device 44 are not limited to those described above, and any type may be used. Furthermore, although the identification information of the middle fluctuation display area 81b is overlapped to reduce the visibility, the visibility may be reduced by overlapping the identification information of the left fluctuation display area 81a or the right fluctuation display area 81c. The operating range and operating mode of the device 44 can be arbitrarily set.
In addition, the visibility may be reduced by overlapping images other than the identification information. It may be one that overlaps with an image that indicates a direction or the like to reduce visibility.

Further, the display on the display plate 350 may be displayed at a position superimposed only on the front surface of the board effect device 44 when the board effect device 44 is at the position when the board effect device 44 descends and completes its operation.
By doing so, a first effect of changing the visibility of the medium-variation display area 81b by deformation or the like, a second effect of changing the visibility of the medium-variation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and a display A third effect for changing the visibility of the board effect device 44 by displaying the plate 350 can be executed independently.
That is, in the case of executing the first effect, the second effect or the third effect alone, or in any combination of the first effect and the second effect, the first effect and the third effect, the second effect and the third effect A case of execution and a case of executing a combination of the first effect, the second effect and the third effect can be executed respectively.

Also, when executing the second effect or the third effect, the medium variation display area 81b and the first decoration game display section 81 may not be displayed. Furthermore, when the second effect or the third effect is executed, the waiting memory display part 83 and the executing memory display part 84 may not be displayed. In this case, the pedestal portions of the standby memory display portion 83 and the in-execution memory display portion 84 (the rectangular display indicating the position where the memory display is displayed in FIG. 52(a)) may be left displayed, or may be displayed. You can choose not to.

Moreover, when a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device is used as the display panel 350, it becomes possible to perform a more diverse display.
For example, when the visibility of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 is lowered due to the display on the display plate 350, the third decoration game may be displayed on the display plate 350. FIG. Also, the third decoration game may be displayed on the display board 350 when the visibility of the first decoration game display section 81 or the second decoration game display section 82 is lowered by the board effect device 44 . By doing so, it is always possible to clearly grasp the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game.
The display position of the third decoration game may be a position that does not overlap the first decoration game display portion 81 or the display position of the second decoration game, or may overlap the display position of the second decoration game.
Further, in the above-described example, in a situation where the board effect device 44 is superimposed on the front side of the medium fluctuation display region 81b, the identification information of the medium fluctuation display region 81b is displayed at a position on the display board 350 which is the front side of the board production device 44. You can do it.
Further, a predetermined display may be performed at a position in front of the board effect device 44 in accordance with the operation of the board effect device 44, and only the visibility of the board effect device 44 may be reduced.

Further, when the visibility of the standby memory display portion 83, the running memory display portion 84, the first start memory number display portion 85a, and the second start memory number display portion 85b is lowered due to the display on the display panel 350, the display panel 350 may display a starting memory display, a running memory display, or the number of starting memories. By doing so, it is always possible to clearly grasp the state of the starting memory.

Further, in the above example, the board effect device 44 is arranged behind the display plate 350, and the board effect device 44 can execute the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. The display board 350 serves as the second effect means capable of executing the third effect of changing the visibility of the first effect means.
The display plate 350 may be arranged behind the board effect device 44. In this case, the display plate 350 is the first effect capable of executing the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. The board effect device 44 serves as a second effect means capable of executing the third effect of changing the visibility of the first effect means.
That is, it is sufficient that the second effect means for changing the visibility of the first effect means is positioned in front of the first effect means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. The structure of the production means may be of any type. For example, both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the board effect device 44, and both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the display board 350.
Further, it is possible to allow three or more effect means to be overlapped in the front and back, so that the effect means located in front changes the visibility of the effect means located in the back.
Further, when the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41 is changed by another image displayed on the display device 41, the first effect means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. becomes the display device 41 .

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the visibility is changed by the first effect. display means (display device 41) for displaying possible predetermined images, first effect means (board effect device 44) capable of executing a second effect for changing the visibility of the predetermined image, and visibility of the first effect means and a second effect means (display board 350) capable of executing a third effect that changes the .
Therefore, it becomes possible to execute various effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, display means (display device 41) for displaying a predetermined image, first effect means (board effect device 44) capable of executing an effect to change the visibility of the predetermined image, and change the visibility of the first effect means and a second effect means (display board 350) capable of executing the effect to cause the player to play.
Therefore, it becomes possible to execute various effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, display means (display means) capable of executing display regarding the game a device 41), a movable accessory (board effect device 44) operable to overlap the front side of the display means, and a display means and the movable accessory arranged in front of the display means and the movable accessory so that the display means and the movable accessory can be seen through. a display board 350 capable of displaying a predetermined display together with A first effect of changing the visibility of the display by changing the display of the display means, and a second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means by operating the movable accessory so as to overlap the display means. And, by displaying a predetermined display on the display panel 350, it is possible to execute the third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed independently, or can be executed in combination.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means can display on the display means a first decoration game that is a display corresponding to the game and a second decoration game that is a display corresponding to the game and is smaller than the first decoration game, When the third effect is being executed, the visibility of the second decoration game is made higher than the visibility of the first decoration game.
Therefore, the progress of the game can be confirmed by at least the second decoration game.

In addition, start storage means (game control device) for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that are the execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the start prize winning area (start prize winning port 36, normal variable prize winning device 37) 100), the effect control means can display a start memory display showing information about the start memory on the display means, and when the third effect is being executed, the visibility of the start memory display is equal to or higher than that of the first decoration game. The visibility is higher than the visibility of
Therefore, it becomes possible to check the information in the starting memory.

[Modified example 1 of support hit determination]
In the above-described embodiment, the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit lottery) is used to perform small hit determination (small hit lottery) and support hit determination (support hit lottery). That is, in the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 7(a)), and the determination result is If it is a big hit, it acquires the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number (see FIG. 7(b)), and if the judgment result is a small hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number. (See FIG. 7 (c)), and if the determination result is a support hit, acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number (see FIG. 7 (d)), and the determination result is any If there is no stop pattern information is acquired, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the support hit is derived only in the low probability state, but the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Also, the support hit may be derived regardless of the game state, or the support hit may be derived only when there is no general electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11). You can do it. In addition, whether or not the support hit can be derived may be selected based on the game state.

[Modified example 2 of support hit determination]
In the above-described embodiment, the lottery is performed using a common jackpot random number for the big win, the small win, and the support win. A lottery may be performed using a big win random number for a small win, and a lottery may be performed using a support win random number for a support win. In this case, for example, distribution ratios as shown in FIG. 56 are obtained. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 56 (a)), and if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, a support hit is determined using a support hit random number. A determination is made (see FIG. 56(d)).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the stop symbol information is acquired using a common special symbol random number in any of the big hit, the small hit and the support hit, but the symbol random number corresponding to each result is provided. Alternatively, a special symbol random number may be used for the big hit and the small hit, and a support hit symbol random number may be used for the support hit.
For example, when the judgment result is a big hit, the stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired (see FIG. 56(b)), and when the judgment result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit pattern random number. (See FIG. 56(c)), and if the determination result is a support hit (that is, if "support is activated"), the stop pattern information corresponding to the support hit symbol random number is obtained. (Refer to FIG. 56(e)), if the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 57 instead of the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. In this special figure start opening switch common processing, the jackpot pattern random numbers which are the jackpot pattern random numbers are extracted and prepared in step A140, and the prepared jackpot pattern random numbers are saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM in step A141.
Next, a small winning design random number which is a small winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the prepared small winning design random number is saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step A144).
After that, the support winning random number is extracted and prepared (step A150a), and the prepared support winning random number is saved in the support winning random number storage area of the RWM (step A150b). A hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A149a), and the prepared support hit symbol random number is saved in the support hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A149b).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 58(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, after performing the process of step A363, the random number per support is loaded from the random number storage area per special support 1 of RWM (for reservation number 1) and prepared (step A374), After performing a process (step A375) for clearing the random number storage area per support (for the reserved number 1) to 0, the process proceeds to step A364. Further, the processing of step A370 is not performed, and the support hit can be derived regardless of the game state.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 58(b) instead of the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, after performing the process of step A383, the support per random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 2 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) (step A394), and the special figure After performing a process (step A395) for clearing the random number storage area per 2 supports (for the reserved number 1) to 0, the process proceeds to step A384. Further, the processing of step A370 is not performed, and the support hit can be derived regardless of the game state.

[Support hit determination process]
In this modified example, the game control device 100 executes the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 59 instead of the support hit determination process shown in FIG. In this support hit determination process, after performing the processing of step A422, it is determined whether the value of the target support hit random number is less than the support hit lower limit determination value (step A423a).

Then, if the value of the target random number per support is less than the lower limit judgment value for support (step A423a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a failure as the determination result (step A428), and perform support hit determination processing. finish. Also, if the value of the target random number per support is not less than the lower limit judgment value for support (step A423a; N), it is determined whether the probability is high (step A424). Then, if it is in a high probability state (step A424; Y), set the upper limit judgment value per support in high probability (step A425), and check whether the value of the random number per support is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support Determine (step A427a). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step A424; N), set the upper limit judgment value per support in low probability (step A426), and determine whether the value of the target random number per support is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support (Step A427a).

If the value of the target support hit random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the determination result (step A428), and end the big hit determination process. In addition, if the value of the target support hit random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination End the process.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, the setting 1 is the most likely to win, and the setting 6 is the least likely to win). is good and vice versa. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. When the probability of a big hit is different for each state, for example, it may be possible to make it easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. . Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit determination is performed using the support hit random number, and when the determination result is a big hit, the big hit pattern random number is supported. If the judgment result is a small hit, the stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number is acquired, and if the judgment result is a support hit, the stop design information corresponding to the support hit design random number. is acquired, and when the determination result is neither, the stop symbol information of the deviation is acquired, and in the specific game state ST11 to ST13, the support hit determination using the support hit random number is not performed, and the determination result is a big hit. In some cases, stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired, if the judgment result is a small hit, stop pattern information corresponding to the small hit pattern random number is acquired, and if the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit You may make it acquire stop design information of a loss. That is, when in the high probability state or during the general electricity support, the process related to the support hit (steps A150a to A150b, steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to A151d, steps A373a to A373b, steps A370 to A372, Steps A393a-A393b, Steps A390-A392, etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modified example 3 of support hit determination]
Further, for example, without performing the support hit determination, it is possible to acquire the support hit design or the losing design using the special symbol random number. That is, if the game is not a big hit or a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number may include the stop symbol information of the win and the support hit. In this case, for example, the apportionment ratio shown in FIG. 60 is obtained. Specifically, for example, the big hit determination and the small hit determination are performed using the big hit random number (see FIG. 60 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number is acquired (see FIG. 60(b)), and when the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 60(c)).

Then, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a low probability state, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the special pattern random number, stop design information of losing or stop design information of support hit is acquired (Fig. 60) (d)).
In addition, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a high-probability state, stop symbol information of losing is acquired.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 62 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A462). If it is in a low probability state (step A462; Y), the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Alternatively, a process (steps A447 to A452) for selecting a support hit is performed. Moreover, when it is not in a low probability state (step A462; N), the process (step A453, A454) which sets a losing design is performed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 63 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A502). If it is in a low probability state (step A502; Y), it is lost by a special figure random number using a special figure 2 per sapo symbol table in which the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Alternatively, a process of selecting a support hit (steps A487 to A492) is performed. Moreover, when it is not in a low probability state (step A502; N), the process (step A493, A494) which sets a losing design is performed.

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support), if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support winning symbol random number is used as support winning stop symbol information or In addition to acquiring lost stop symbol information, in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small win, the lost stop symbol information may be acquired.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a high probability state (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, The support hit may be derived only in the case of the first specific game state ST11), or the support win may be derived regardless of the game state.

[Modified example 4 of support hit determination]
The small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning) and the support winning pattern (result mode of the supporting win) may be used together. Specifically, for example, a combined design serving as both a small winning design and a support winning design is provided, and when the combined design is stopped and displayed on the display device 41 (and the batch display device 50), the small winning game state is established. After the game ends, the chance mode (third specific game state ST13) may be entered.
In this case, for example, the distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. Specifically, for example, using a big hit random number, perform a big hit determination and a small hit determination (see FIG. 64 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number is obtained (see FIG. 64(b)).
Then, when the determination result is a small hit, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the special pattern random number, the small hits A to C that serve as both the small hit pattern and the support pattern or the small hit pattern that does not serve as the support pattern. Acquire one of the hits D (see FIG. 64(c)).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440; Y), the distribution value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set. A special figure 1 small hit design table for high probability is set (step A463).

Next, it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A464), and if it is not in a low probability state (step A464; N), it is small by a special symbol random number using a high probability special symbol 1 per sapo symbol table Processing (steps A441 to A445) for selecting the winning type is performed.
Also, in the case of the low probability state (step A464; Y), set the low probability special figure 1 small winning pattern table in which the distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set Then (step A465), the processing (steps A441 to A445) for selecting the type of small hit by special symbol random numbers is performed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480; Y), the distribution value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set. A special figure 2 small hit design table for high probability is set (step A503).

Next, it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A504), and if it is not in a low probability state (step A504; N), it is small by a special symbol random number using a special symbol 2 per sapo symbol table for high probability Processing (steps A481 to A485) for selecting the winning type is performed.
Also, in the case of a low probability state (step A504; Y), a special figure 2 small winning pattern table for low probability in which a distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set is set. Then (step A505), the processing (steps A481 to A485) for selecting the type of small hit by special symbol random numbers is performed.

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support), if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support winning symbol random number is used as support winning stop symbol information or In addition to acquiring lost stop symbol information, in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small win, the lost stop symbol information may be acquired.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a high probability state (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, The support hit may be derived only in the case of the first specific game state ST11), or the support win may be derived regardless of the game state.
In addition, in the case of a support win, the number of times of support may be set to be one or more times, and in the case of a small win, the number of times of support may be selected to be 0 times. When 0 times is selected as the number of times of support, the specific game state ends with the game. Conversely, in the case of a support win, the number of times of support may be set to 0, and in the case of a small win, the number of times of support may be set to 1 or more.
In addition, in the case of a game machine that performs a so-called two-type game in which only a small win can be won without a big win, a small win lottery is performed using a small win random number, and if a small win is won, It is possible to select a small hit type by a special symbol random number. In this case, 0 may be selected as the number of times of support.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state when the result of the game becomes a special result, game control means (game control device) for controlling the game 100), and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the special result includes the first special result (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device and the operation of the condition device. There is a second special result (minor win), and the game control means has a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than the normal game state, and a special game state. , and when the result of the game is a predetermined result of the second special result, the specific game state is generated after the special game state (small win game state, second special game state) is generated. Before the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether the result of the game will be a first special result, a second special result, or a losing result.
Therefore, even in the case of the second special result, the specific game state can be generated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example 5 of support hit determination]
Although the selection of the type of support hit is performed by the special symbol random number, it may be selected by the big hit random number.
For example, as the judgment value of the jackpot random number, the range of the support hit is divided into the ranges of the support hit A, the support hit B, and the support hit C, and if the extracted jackpot random value falls within the support hit range, which range Depending on whether or not it is applicable, it is also possible to set the win for the supporter and the symbol for the supporter. In this case, for big hits and small hits, the type is selected by the special symbol random numbers, but like the support hit, the type is not selected by the special symbol random numbers, and the type is selected by the big hit random numbers. good.
In addition, in the case of a game machine that performs so-called two-type games in which only small wins can be won without big wins, the lottery and selection of types of support wins are similarly performed using small win random numbers for drawing small wins. is possible.

[Other modification 1]
The normal variable winning device 37 may be arranged at a position where both left-handed and right-handed players can win (for example, the lower center of the game area 32). For example, in the case of frequently stopping support win symbols (support win A symbols, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support, chance mode starts and ends frequently. By arranging the normal variable winning device 37 at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win, it is not necessary to separate the game balls into the left game area and the right game area according to the start and end of the chance mode. Gone. In addition, when the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win, the large winning opening and the normal winning opening are positioned upstream of the large winning opening in the right game area. A variable winning device 37 may be provided with a function (such as a nail or a channel) for distributing game balls. In addition, the support winning symbol that corresponds to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support winning A symbol corresponding to the support number of times of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be a certain support winning pattern.

[Other modification 2]
It is also possible to provide a support hit pattern (support hit result mode) in the result mode of the normal figure fluctuation display game without providing a support hit pattern (support hit result mode) in the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. That is, instead of deriving the support hit in the special figure variation display game, the support hit may be derived in the normal figure variation display game.

[Other modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game is shifted to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is always executed. That is, irrespective of the stopping support winning symbol (the number of times of support provided), the right-handed instruction effect is executed when the game shifts to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the support hit pattern (support hit A pattern, etc.) with a relatively small number of corresponding support stops, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed to prompt the user to accumulate the second start memory. can be Note that the support win symbol corresponding to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol corresponding to the support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the corresponding support count is 1 time. It may be a support winning pattern.
Also, only when the first special figure fluctuation display game after shifting to the chance mode is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed and the second start memory is stored. You can encourage me.
Further, only when the normal game state ST14 is shifted to the chance mode, when the shift is made to the chance mode, a right-handed instruction effect may be executed to prompt the player to store the second start memory.

[Other modification 4]
In this embodiment, when it is not in the general electric support, it is a state where there is no time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal diagram fluctuation display game, and when it is in the general electric support, it is a time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the general diagram fluctuation display game is shortened. Since it is in a certain state, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is not in the general electric support is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is in the general electric support, but this is not limited to For example, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power is not supported may be the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power support is in progress. As a result, it becomes possible to accumulate the second starting memory immediately after shifting to the chance mode. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, it shifts to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. By generating the second start memory before the game, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, which is advantageous for the player. You can proceed with the game.
In addition, if the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is not in the general electric support is the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the general electric power support is in progress, the general electric support It is preferable to set the normal pattern per probability to 0 when not in the middle.

[Other modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the number of times of support given this time is always notified when the chance mode is entered. That is, regardless of the stopped support per pattern (number of support given), when the stop display time starts, the number of support given this time is notified, but it is not limited to this. Whether or not to report the number of times of support may be determined according to the number of times of support. Specifically, for example, when a support win symbol (support win A symbol, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of support times stops, the number of support times given this time is not notified even if the stop display time starts. In addition, when other support winning symbols are stopped, when the stop display time starts, the number of times of support given this time may be notified. Note that the support win symbol that corresponds to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol that corresponds to a support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the corresponding support count is less than 10 times. It may be a certain support winning pattern.

[Other modification 6]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the right-handed instruction effect (instruction of the shooting direction) is displayed as a variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (assist winning game) in which the result is a specific result. Made it start on start. That is, the right-handed instruction effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the stop display time of the support winning game. It may be started at the start time (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 7]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (assist winning game) in which the result is the specified result. bottom. That is, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the chance mode notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game that is executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or at the stop display time of the support winning game. It may be started at the start time (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game). Also, the chance mode notification effect and the right-hand hitting instruction effect may be started at the same timing, or may be started at different timings.

[Other modification 8]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the support number notification effect is started at the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (t66, t76), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support number notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or may be executed first after shifting to the chance mode. It may be started at the start of the variable display of the special figure variable display game (t68, t78). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 9]
In addition, in the present embodiment, the same random number is used to obtain the big winning pattern, the small winning pattern and the support winning pattern, but the big winning pattern, the small winning pattern and the supporting winning pattern are obtained using different random numbers. You can make it work. In other words, different random numbers may be used as the big-hit pattern random number, the small-hit pattern random number, and the supporter-hit design random number to sort the big-hit design, the small-hit design, and the supporter-hit design.

[Other modification 10]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game over the other, or the special figure 1 variation display game And it may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game in order of winning.

[Other modification 11]
The configuration of the gaming machine may be a so-called 1 + 2 gaming machine in which a special game state is generated by winning a prize in the specific area 38h. FIG. 67 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the gaming machine of this modified example.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a third specific game state ST13, a special game state ST15, and a small winning game state ST16. Also, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of deriving a special result is always constant.

In the normal game state ST14, there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the variable time of the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game is shortened. There is no short time. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The third specific game state ST13 is a state in which there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation. When the special figure variation display game of the number of times of support is executed in this third specific game state ST13, it shifts to the normal game state ST14.

When a big hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the special game state ST15. Then, after the special game state ST15 ends, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of big win.

When a small hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game moves to a small win game state ST16. Then, when the game ball flows into the specific area 38h (V winning) in the small winning game state ST16, the special game state ST15 is entered. After the end of the special game state ST15 in this case, the transition destination differs depending on the type of the derived small win, and if the number of times of support is set to 0, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. In addition, when the number of times of support is set to a value other than 0, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of small win.

When the game ball does not flow into the specific area 38h in the small winning game state ST16, the transition destination differs depending on the type of the derived small winning, and if the small winning is set to 0 times for the number of times of support, it is normal. It shifts to game state ST14. Further, when the number of times of support is set to a value other than 0, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of small win.

FIG. 68 shows the allocation rate in the gaming machine of this modified example. All small hits also serve as support symbols, and the number of support times set for each is different. Incidentally, as in the first embodiment, the results of only the support symbols may be provided.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 in place of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. .

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 in place of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. .

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 69 is performed in the specific area switch monitoring process (step A10) in the special game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). During the small hit here is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If the small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing. Moreover, when it is during a small hit (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step A42).

If the condition device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Afterwards, processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the existence of this specific area passing flag.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 70 is performed in the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special game process. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. Also, if the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. Also, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the processing for ending the small hits after step A863 is performed.

That is, after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, the process for ending the small win is performed. However, in the case of a residual ball error, which is a state in which discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the last game ball entered the first special variable prize winning device 38, the time required for discharge has passed sufficiently. As a result, the process is shifted to end the small hit. Of course, when there is a remaining ball error, the processing for ending the small hit may not be performed. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the processing for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has passed (step A863). When a gaming ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a specific area passage based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. If there is passage through the specific area (step A863; Y), the process proceeds to step A870 to perform processing for generating a special game state. Moreover, when there is no specific area passage (step A863; N), it transfers to step A864, finishes a small hit game state, and performs the process for making a special figure variation display game executable.

In the processing for terminating the small winning game state after step A864 and making the special figure variation display game executable, 10 for the small winning end processing is set as the processing number (step A864), and the special figure game processing number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (step A865). Next, the small winning ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A866), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A867). Then, the big winning hole count area is cleared (step A868), the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small hit remaining ball processing is finished.

On the other hand, there is a specific area passing (step A863; Y), when performing the process of generating a special game state after step A870, load the command from the decoration special figure command area and prepare (step A870), production command Setting processing is performed (step A871). Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, the signal related to the start of the big win (V big win) is saved in the external information output data area (step A874), and the test signal related to the start of the big win (V big win) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the continuous operation device The operating signal is turned on, and the special pattern 2 winning signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A875).

Then, the number of the jackpot is saved in the game state display number area (step A876), the round number upper limit table is set (step A877), and the round number upper limit value (this modification) corresponding to the round number upper limit information In case 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small win operation corresponds to the first round, 9 rounds are released in the special game state by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds. I'm trying

After that, set 3 for fanfare/interval processing as the processing number (step A881), and save in the special figure game processing number area (step A882). Further, the V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A883), the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (step A884) is performed, and the processing proceeds to step A868.

With the configuration as described above, the following characteristic game progression is possible.
Since the third specific game state ST13 is a game state with a high possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area 38h and shifts to the special game state ST15 in the small win game state ST16 accompanying the derivation of the small win, the normal game state This game state is more advantageous for the player than ST14, and the longer this game state continues, the more advantageous it becomes for the player.
As the type of the small win derived in the third specific game state ST13, if a small win with a non-zero support count is derived, the third specific game state ST13 can be continued, but the support count is zero. When a small hit is derived, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST14. That is, the derivation of a small win with the number of times of support being 0 triggers the player to fall into a disadvantageous gaming state. By providing such a fall opportunity, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the third specific game state ST13.

From the above, a game is controlled in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. game control means (game control device 100) and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the special result includes the first special result accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the condition There is a second special result that does not involve the operation of the device, and the game control means is a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than the normal game state, and a special game state. and, based on the result of the game becoming the first special result, the first special game state can be generated as a special game state, and after the first special game state is generated, the specific game state can be generated, the second special game state can be generated as a special game state based on the result of the game becoming the second special result, and when the second special game state is generated, the first special It is possible to generate the specific game state without generating the game state.
Therefore, since the specific game state can be generated based on the second special result that does not involve the operation of the conditional device, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the special variable winning device includes a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39, and has a specific area 38h into which game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 can flow. , based on the derivation of the first special result or the flow into the specific area 38h, it is possible to execute the first special game state that can convert the second special variable winning device 39 to the open state, and based on the derivation of the second special result , the second special game state capable of converting the first special variable winning device 38 to the open state can be executed, and the game control means is a special figure that can be executed in the specific game state according to the type of the derived special result. When the number of executions of the variation display game is set, and a special result is derived during execution of the specific game state, the remaining number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the specific game state being executed is discarded, It is configured to set the number of executions based on the derived special result, and 0 can be set as the number of executions set based on the special result.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set the specific game state to end or not to start the specific game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, a start prize winning port 36 is provided in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning of a game ball, and the game control means can execute a first game as a game based on the winning of a game ball to the start prize winning port 36, and a normal variable prize winning. A second game can be executed as a game based on the winning of game balls to the device 37, and the number of executions of the specific game state can be set to 0 when the result of the second game is the second special result. It will happen.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set the specific game state to end or not to start the specific game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the dual-purpose symbol serving as both the small winning symbol and the support winning symbol is used, it is also possible to provide a support symbol that does not serve both as the small winning symbol and the supporting winning symbol.
In this case, by providing a support symbol in which the number of times of support is 0 as the support symbol, the configuration similar to that of the present modification described above can be obtained.
In addition, in the special figure 1 variable display game, only the small win with the support count of 0 is provided, but a small win with a support count other than 0 may be provided, or a small win may not occur. Also good.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be awarded, and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11) are specified. a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and a special game state; is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variable A jackpot) of the special results, a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is a special result When a different specific result (support hit) is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state (see FIG. 8).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) occurs with a predetermined probability until the special game state occurs, it is possible to suppress the player's usage amount and suppress the reduction speed of the ball. is possible, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the specific game state (general electric support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, there is a risk that gambling will become too high. When the game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the number of balls released in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the wave of paid out balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST13). When a result is obtained, the specific game period being set can be reset, and the period corresponding to the specific result can be set again (see FIG. 10).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (support number) Since it is possible to extend the time, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST13). When a result is obtained, the period corresponding to the specific result can be added to the remaining period of the specific game period, and can be configured to be reset as the specific game period (Fig. reference).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (support number) Since it will be extended, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means, after the special game state occurs Occurred specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and specific game state that occurred without the occurrence of a special game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) And, it can be configured to be able to execute the production.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13).
In addition, the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and the specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), different modes of effects may be executed. Thereby, whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot), or a specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (support hit) Since it is possible to suggest whether it is in the state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same mode of effect may be executed.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state ( When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same between the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same mode of presentation may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of the present embodiment) and the corresponding number of support times of 100 times. The production mode of the production executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (in the case of this embodiment, the support hit B) may be the same.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous for the player. When this happens, it is possible to configure so as to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the current game (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

[Special figure fluctuation display game and decorative special figure fluctuation display game]
Next, a special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

71 and 72 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big hit". FIG. 71 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 72 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 71(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing" (the LED lamp A0 is turned on and the LED lamps A1 to A7 are turned off mode). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is also "off" result mode (the LED lamp B0 is turned on and the LED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off) and It's becoming

Also, here, since it is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so in the display device 41, the first The numerical value of the starting memory number display section 85a is "1", and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 85b is "0". 0 decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) is displayed. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 corresponds to "one special figure reservation" (the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off ( (See FIG. 4 (d))), and the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 corresponds to "no special figure reservation" (the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) reference)).

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes. Here, since the first starting memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display (decorating special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0, The numerical value of the first start memory number display section 85a becomes "0". In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 changes, and the mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (the mode in which the LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) see)).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbols) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display section 81, and the left area of the second decoration game display section 82, The variable display of the identification information (small pattern) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. In addition, the variation display on the special figure 1 indicator 51, that is, the mode corresponding to "varying" (the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit and alternately) (see FIG. 4(b)) starts. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable time starts, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game start, but the variation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the variation time When the time elapses, the variable display of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the number of decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation display 53 The display mode of changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t11), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "big win". It is "333", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. When the special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), the first special game state ends when the ending time of the jackpot ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t13). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

In this embodiment, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are hidden simultaneously with the start of the special game state, and thereafter, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 81 are hidden simultaneously with the start of the variable time. The 2 decoration game display section 82 reappears. That is, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the change time starts. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 71(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t13). Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t13 to t14). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 71 (d)) maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t11 to t14), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t14), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases (t14 to t15) during this low-speed variation, and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 71(f) is performed ( t15-t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t16). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 71(g), the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. , the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 71(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t18).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 72 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 . Therefore, in FIG. 72, "t14" is the timing at which the identification information (left pattern) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts to fluctuate at low speed, and the identification information (right pattern) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the middle fluctuation display The timing at which the identification information (medium pattern) displayed in the area starts to fluctuate at low speed is between "t14" and "t15". Also, "t16" is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation starts), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation starts) is "t16" and "t17." between Further, "t17" is the timing at which the left symbol starts to temporarily stop, "t18" is the timing at which the right symbol starts to temporarily stop, and "t18" and "t19" are the timings at which the middle symbol starts to temporarily stop. is between

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14-t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t19), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a starting memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game will start. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 71(i) is different among FIGS. 71(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in FIG. It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t13 to t14), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit", and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is the result mode of the "jackpot".
Therefore, in this case, the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. , Variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51), and variation of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next Display (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "loss" Similarly, in the case of executing the variable display game, in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the next The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next will be started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 display device 51 In a state consistent with the stop pattern, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next, and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next will be started.
Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display device In a state consistent with 52 stop symbols, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next. and will be started.

73 and 74 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big hit". FIG. 73 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 74 shows an example of a timing chart. Since FIGS. 73(a) and (b) show the same state as FIGS. 71(a) and (b), description thereof will be omitted.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the display device 41 In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t21), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "big win". It is "333", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t23). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 73(e). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the second start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, from the start of the variable time to the transition effect (effect to display to shift the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) to the start When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (Fig. 71 (a), (b), Fig. 71 (e), (f), Fig. 73 (a), ( b)), when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (Fig. 73 ( e), (f)) and the case of executing the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game are the same. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, by differentiating the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory, the decoration special figure being displayed It notifies which of the first starting memory and the second starting memory the graphic starting memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to either the first start memory or the second start memory. You can make it work.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 73(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t23 to t24). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 73 (d)) maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t21 to t24), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t24 to t25), and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 73(f) is performed ( t25-t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t26). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t26 to t27), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t27-t29). As shown in FIG. 73(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t28).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 74 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24-t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24 to t29), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t29), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed in the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 73(i) is different among FIGS. 73(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in FIG. It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "missing", as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, at the start of the next special figure 2 variation display game (t23 to At t24), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is followed by the special figure 2 When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is followed by the special figure Similarly, when executing the 2-variation display game, the stop symbols (minor winning symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are displayed. In a state inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing the variable display game, the stop symbols (hit symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. Become.

When the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 variation display is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result mode of "losing" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game The result (“Hit” result mode) may be displayed first, then the “Loss” result mode may be displayed, or the “Loss” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result.) There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "big hit". FIG. 75 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 76 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 75(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is also the result mode of "off".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the second start memory number display part 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the numerical value of the first start memory number display portion 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t31), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed in the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "big win". It is "333", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t33). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display section 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 75(e). After that, as shown in FIG. 75(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the first start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85a changes. Also, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 75(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t33). Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t33 to t34) , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 75 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variable display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t31 to t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t34), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t34 to t35), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 75(f) is performed ( t35-t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t36). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t36 to t37), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t37-t39). As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation is started (t38).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 76 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t39), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 75(i) is different among FIGS. 75(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in FIG. 75(i) is "win". It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, at the start of the next special figure 1 variation display game (t33 to At t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "jackpot". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is next to the special figure Similarly, in the case of executing the 1-variation display game, the stop symbols (minor winning symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are displayed. is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (hit symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. Become.

When the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 variation display is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result mode of "lost" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed first, then the “losing” result mode may be displayed, or the “losing” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result.) There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 are inconsistent with the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 77 and 78 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "normal jackpot". FIG. 77 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 78 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 77(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 77(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the display device 41 In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t41), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the results modes of "normal jackpot".

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of the first start memory is 0 and the number of the second start memory is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t43). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 77(e). After that, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the second start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222" (see FIG. 77(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t43). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t43 to t44). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 77 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t41 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t44 to t45), and eventually a high-speed variation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 77(f) is performed ( t45-t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t46). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. (t47-t49). As shown in FIG. 77(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t48).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 78 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t49), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 77(i) is different among FIGS. 77(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in FIG. 77(i) is "win". It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal jackpot". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, at the start of the next special figure 2 variation display game (t43 ~ t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variable jackpot".

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "probability variable big hit" Similarly, in the case of executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the special figure 2 display 52 symbol) is inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next It will start.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. In the state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of the display device 52 does not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "regular jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the invention is not limited to this. For example, if one of the "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot" and the other one is set as the "second jackpot", the stop symbol will be the same. The variable display of the next game is started in a state of inconsistency.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 2 variation display game is executed, the variation display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of "probability variation jackpot"), or the result of "probability variation jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area). If game balls do not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state is reached.

FIGS. 79 and 80 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "normal jackpot". FIG. 79 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 80 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 79(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 79(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the second start memory number display part 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the numerical value of the first start memory number display portion 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t51), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display section 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 79(e). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the first start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85a changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222" (see FIG. 79(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t53 to t54). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 79 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t51 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t54 to t55), and eventually a high-speed variation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 79(f) is performed ( t55-t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t56). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. (t57-t59). As shown in FIG. 79(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t58).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 80 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t59), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 79(i) is different among FIGS. 79(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in FIG. 79(i) is "win". It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, at the start of the next special figure 1 variation display game (t53 ~ t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variable jackpot".

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (variable jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 ), the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Similarly, in the case of executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the first ornament game display unit 81 and the second ornament game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 symbol) is inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next It will start.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. In the state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of the display device 51 does not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if one of the "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot" and the other one is set as the "second jackpot", the stop symbol will be the same. The variable display of the next game is started in a state of inconsistency.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 1 variable display game is executed, the variable display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of "probability variation jackpot"), or the result of "probability variation jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 are inconsistent with the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first When the stop symbols of the decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 are matched with the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the matching state remains. Start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure remains in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the 1 variation display game and the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second display device 41 When the stop pattern of the 2 decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 are matched, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game remains in the matching state. And start the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the special figure will remain in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game in FIG. 2 is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Hereinafter, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are consistent at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching If there is
Also, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are not consistent at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are not consistent at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching. If there is no

In the above description, as an example of "if consistent", when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation Although the case of executing the display game has been mentioned, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "big hit", the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "big hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing a variable display game, or when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display where the result is "missing" Also when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to the game, it is "matched".

Also, in the above description, as an example of "not matching", the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "hit When executing the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 73 and 74), and the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 "missing" result mode is stopped and the result is "hit" Special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 76), and collective display device 50 Special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 52 and the result is "second big hit" (see FIGS. 77 and 78), and when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "second big hit ”, the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 79 and 80), but “if not consistent” is limited to these cases not. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "hit" and the result is "loss" special figure 1 variation display game is followed by special figure 2 variation When the display game is executed, or when the result mode of "either one of the big hit or the small win" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "big hit or small win" When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game which is "either one of the hits", it is also "not consistent".

Here, the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. The high-speed fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area start high-speed fluctuation (the low-speed fluctuation ends) at the same time. End (start slow variation).
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 stops displaying a desired result mode (here, "424") on the first decorative game display section 81. , the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 is set at the start of high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46, t56). ).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 72, 74, and 76, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333", the variation display starting from "333" is started (t14, t24, t34). Then, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display starting from "333" from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the large pattern high speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35). A first replacement process for replacing with variable display is executed. In addition, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode, the game result and the remaining fluctuation time (t16-t19, t26-t29, t36-t39), A second replacement process is executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the variable pattern (whether or not a reach state occurs, etc.).

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222", the variation display starting from "222" is started (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 changes the variable display starting from "222" to the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation (t45, t55). A first replacement process is performed to replace the . Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t46, t56), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed as the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t46 to t49, t56 to t59), and the fluctuation pattern (reach state A second replacement process is executed to replace with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the presence or absence of occurrence, etc.).
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

In order to stop display a desired result mode on the first decorative game display section 81, it is also possible to replace the large symbols during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large pattern has been replaced, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbols during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbols have been replaced.

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the large symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the large symbols are changing at high speed.
Also, the number of times the large pattern is replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of replacing the large symbol may be one, and in that case, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbols (or after the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbols and before the end of the high-speed variation, the large symbols (may be at the end of the high-speed fluctuation), the fluctuation display starting from the result form of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is replaced with the fluctuation display starting from the result form calculated backward based on the game result etc. Second replacement It is better to process. Moreover, when the number of times of replacing the large pattern is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process.

Further, in the first decoration game display section 81, the reach variation may be performed directly from the high speed variation without going through the low speed variation instead of performing the reach variation from the high speed variation via the low speed variation. If the low-speed variation is not passed, for example, when the high-speed variation of the large symbols ends, the large symbols (for example, the left and right symbols) that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 are displayed in a desired reach mode (desired You may perform a replacement process to replace with a reach pattern).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbols) of the second decorative game display section 82 starts to fluctuate at high speed (starts fluctuating display) at the same time in the left area, the right area, and the middle area. At the same time as the region, the high-speed fluctuation ends (finishes the fluctuation display).
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 stops displaying a desired result mode (here, "424") on the second decoration game display section 82. , the identification information (small symbols) of the second decoration game display section 82 is replaced at the end of the high speed variation (t19, t29, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, when the high-speed variation of the small symbols ends, a third replacement process is performed to replace the small symbols stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 with a desired result mode.
Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the small symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbols are changing at high speed. When the small symbols are replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols, a first replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode. A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the remaining variable time, the variable pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, the third replacement process need not be performed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
Further, when executing the first replacement processing for replacing the small symbols, the second replacement processing for replacing the small symbols is performed after the first replacement processing, or alternatively, the small symbols are replaced at high speed. It is preferable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Also, the number of times that the small pattern is replaced may be one time or a plurality of times. If the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. Moreover, when the number of times that the small symbols are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process should be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is "matched" (eg, t13 to t14) and "not matched" (eg, t23 to t24, t33 to t34, t43 to t44, t53 to t54).
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t14 to t15) and "not matched" (eg, t24 to t25, t34 to t35, t44 to t45, t54 to t55) are the same.
In addition, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t15 to t16) and "not matched" (eg, t25 to t16). t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation is "matched" (for example, t16 to t17) and "not matched" (for example, t26 to t27, t36-t37, t46-t47, t56-t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t17 to t18) and "not matched" (eg, t27 to t28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58).
In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time is "matched" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matched" (eg, t28 to t29, t38 to t39, t48 to t49, t58 to t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation, and the time from the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation, the time from the start of the large pattern temporary stop display to the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation, and the large pattern reach By making each time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "if consistent" and "if not consistent", start the fluctuation display in the inconsistent state The variation time in the case where the variable display is started and the variation time in the case where the variable display is started in the matching state can be the same time. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not there is a match when determining the fluctuation time (variation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between "when matching" and "when not matching". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special game state when the mode is set, and is a first variable display game based on satisfaction of a first start condition (a prize in a start winning port 36) among the start conditions as a variable display game. First variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variation display game), and establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions as a variation display game (to normal variation winning device 37 Control the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means and the second variable display means a game control means (game control device 100) that corresponds to a variable display game and variably displays an identification pattern (large pattern); a second decoration game for variably displaying patterns (small patterns); an effect display means (display device 41) capable of displaying; and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means; When the second variable display game is executed after the first variable display game, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the effect display means stopped and displayed at the start of the second variable display game. There is a case where the result mode of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is inconsistent, and in such a case, processing is performed to bring these result modes into a consistent state. The game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game, and the effect control means controls the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. ) to start the variable display of identification symbols (see FIGS. 73 and 77).

Therefore, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) and the second If the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is not consistent, the second variation display game and the second variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game remain in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41), When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game are performed in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the match is not made, the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a special result mode ("hit" result mode). At the end of the special game state that occurred, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode ("lost" result mode) And, the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is 0, and the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) The number of starting memory (second starting memory) to be the execution right is one or more, in which case the game control means (game control device 100), after the end of the special game state, the second From a state in which result modes other than the special result mode are stopped and displayed in the second variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (the effect control device 300) After the end of the game state, as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started. (See FIGS. 73 and 77).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the effect display means (display device 41) is a winning pattern, and the stopped pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the game can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. pattern, and when the stop pattern of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) is a lost pattern, the second variable display game and the second variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is changed to the special result mode is not limited to the "winning" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of the "big win" among the result modes of the "hit", or only the result mode of the "minor win" among the result modes of the "hit". It may be only the result mode of "probability variable big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". Alternatively, only the result mode of "10R jackpot" among the result modes of "hit" may be used, or only the result mode of "7R hit" among the result modes of "hit" may be used. , Only the result mode of "2R win" may be included in the result mode of "hit".

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300), in a state in which the starting memory as the execution right of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stored, It is configured to execute the 2-variation display game with priority over the special figure 1-variation display game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, if the number of second starting memories is 1 or more, the number of first starting memories does not have to be 0 (that is, the number of first starting memories is 1 or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (second It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories) is 1 or more, but the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0" does not need to be satisfied.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, the first starting memory number must be greater than or equal to one and the second starting memory number must be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (second The number of starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more. ” must be satisfied.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game became the special result mode is terminated. Sometimes, the second starting memory number should be greater than or equal to one and the first starting memory number should be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (first The number of starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more. ” must be satisfied.

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode At the end of , if the number of first starting memories is one or more, the number of second starting memories does not have to be zero (that is, the number of second starting memories may be one or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (first It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories) is 1 or more, but the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 0" does not need to be satisfied.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variation display game (one of a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game) and a second variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game). (the other of the games) may be executed in order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more". or "the earliest starting memory among the starting memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that it is a starting memory that is

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and a start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is possible to configure so that the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed in the order in which it is stored.
And, when configured in this way, if the above is not matched,
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is 0 and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more;
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is one or more. and the case where the starting memory stored first is the starting memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game, and in these cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means changes the display of the identification information in the second variable display game from a state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result modes other than the special result mode. and start
After the end of the special game state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to initiate a floating display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is the winning symbol. If the stopped symbol on the second variable display means is a lost symbol, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the game can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the A low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols can be identified and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are difficult to identify, and the identification symbol fluctuation display in the first decoration game corresponding to the second fluctuation display game is possible. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed variation display mode through the high-speed variation display mode is the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variation display means at the start of the second variation display game and the effect display. The result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14-t16) and when it is not consistent (t24-t26, t34-t36, t44-t46, t54-56). and can be configured to be identical.
By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be set to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and when the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the information (large pattern) to the start of the low speed fluctuation through the high speed fluctuation is different between the "matching case" and the "mismatching case". , the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the The identification pattern can be converted into a high-speed variation display mode that is difficult to identify, and after the start of the variation display of the identification symbol in the second decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display is performed through the high-speed variation display mode. The time until the end (t14-t19, t24-t29, t34-t39, t44-t49, t54-59) is the result of the stop display on the second variable display means at the start of the second variable display game. When the mode and the result mode of the second decoration game stopped and displayed on the effect display means match (t14 to t19), and when they do not match (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49). , t54 to t59).
By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be set to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and when the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the variable display through high-speed fluctuation is different between "matching" and "not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, there is a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed but the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is displayed. There may be a mode in which decoration games are not displayed.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.
For example, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game, and a decoration special figure corresponding to the main variation (special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state) In a gaming machine that displays only a variable display game and does not display a decorative special variable display game that corresponds to an irregular variation (a special variable display game that is determined not to be the main variation in each gaming state), the main variation is switched. At the start of the first special figure variation display game, the stop pattern of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, in the second game state At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed for the first time, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 There is a case where it is not consistent with the stop pattern. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Also, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, it is executed first in the first game state At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41, and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 may not be consistent. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the game machine is capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the main variation provided in the display area of the display device 41 is a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation. In the gaming machine that displays on the display unit and displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation on the irregular variation display unit provided in the display area of the display device 41, the main variation is switched and the first feature At the start of the figure variation display game, the stop symbol on the main variation display portion of the display device 41 and the stop symbol on the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, in the second game state At the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed for the first time, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 may not match. . In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Also, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, it is executed first in the first game state At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 may not match. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time.

First, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 81, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting a game ball from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the first starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board presentation device 44 having a movable member and a light-emitting member, and performing game presentation by the operation of the movable member and the light emission of the light-emitting member.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is a first start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 82). In the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for recovering game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided.

A general prize winning port 35 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the left of the first start prize winning port 36 . Winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 82). In addition, in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 and in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the right of the first start winning opening 36, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is also detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 82).

As shown in FIG. 81 , a normal symbol start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the upper part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 82) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed. Below the normal figure starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this general winning hole 35 .

In the central part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted between a state where game balls are not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. ) 38 are provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by tilting the opening/closing member 38c to the right around the lower end. The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 82).

Inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), a specific area into which game balls can flow is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 82) is provided to change the probability of game balls flowing into the specific area. ) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 82) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Further, inside the upper grand prize winning port, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 82) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of playing balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), and the number detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed is designed not to open a new upper grand prize opening.

At the lower part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (first start winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) is provided. ing. A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 82). The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a plate-like movable member 37b that can slide back and forth. unfavorable condition). Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the movable member 37b is retreated backward by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 82) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is played. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which balls can easily flow in.

In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c. The movable member of the device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted “C” shape by opening. Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this normal variable winning device 37 . The flow path on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30a for recovering game balls that do not win, such as a winning port. Also, the left channel of the normal variable winning device 37 communicates with the lower part of the game area 32 .
In the right part of the game area 32 below the center case 40, that is, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start winning opening 97 that gives the starting condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) (Second startup winning area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 82).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36 and to the left of the second starting winning opening 97, there is a state where game balls are not accepted due to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A second special variable prize winning device (lower grand prize winning opening) 39 is provided which can be converted to a state of easy acceptance. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (sliding) of the opening/closing member 39c. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 82). The game area 32 on the right side is covered with a transparent plate that allows the game area 32 to be seen through.
In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower left part of the game board main body 80, a package for executing a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a normal figure fluctuation display game A display device 50 is provided.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variation winning device 37 is not the second start winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game), but the special figure 1 variation The point that it is the first start winning area that gives the start condition of the display game (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) below the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 3) in that a second start winning port 97 (second start winning area) is provided to give the start condition of .

FIG. 82 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 82, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment has an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 connected to the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97. It differs from the game control device 100 (see FIG. 5) of one embodiment.

FIG. 83 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the same random number as used for the big hit determination (big hit lottery) is used to perform the small hit determination (small hit lottery) and the support hit determination (support hit lottery). That is, in the present embodiment, using the jackpot random number, the jackpot determination, the small hit determination, and the support hit determination are performed (see FIG. 83 (a)), and when the determination result is a jackpot, the special symbol random number Acquire stop design information corresponding to (see FIG. 83 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit, acquire stop design information corresponding to the special symbol random number (see FIG. 83 (c)) , If the determination result is a support hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83 (d)), and if the determination result is neither, the stop design information of the loss is obtained. get. In addition, the support hit may be derived only when the low probability state (normal game state ST24, third specific game state ST23), or the state without general electric support (normal game state ST24, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST21), or may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST24 (low probability no support).

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST24, a first specific game state ST21, a second specific game state ST22, and a third specific game state ST23. In addition, as the game state, there is a first special game state (big win game state) based on the first special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) based on the second special result (small win). is omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result (jackpot) to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the game In the state, the main starting area which is the starting area to be mainly aimed at, the main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first starting prize-winning port 36 by hitting to the left, and to aim to win a prize in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 or the second starting prize-winning port 97 by hitting to the right. It is possible. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.
Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 is higher than the special figure 1 in the small hit probability, which is the probability of becoming a small hit (second special result).

The normal game state ST24 is a state where the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST24, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST24. .

The first specific game state ST21 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, but special figure variable display. There is a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game and the normal figure fluctuation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second start winning opening 97, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In this first specific game state ST21, the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST24, and the player hits to the right and aims at the second start winning opening 97, thereby achieving a special figure. Playing the two-variation display game is more advantageous for the player. Since the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small win than the special figure 1 variation display game, and the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of a big win, the small win is high in the first specific game state ST21. It occurs with frequency and the number of balls held by the player increases. Since small hits occur with high frequency in this way, the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST22 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this second specific game state ST22, the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game becomes shorter than in the case of the normal game state ST24. It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.
The third specific game state ST23 is the same as the second specific game state ST22 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST24 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST23 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST24 because of the general power support, and the second specific game state ST22 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST24 and the third game state ST22 This state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state ST23. The first specific game state ST21 is a high probability state, and furthermore, it is a state in which the player's ball possession increases due to frequent occurrence of small hits, so the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game This state is more advantageous for the player than the state ST23.
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 83(b), there are two types of jackpots in the special figure 1 variation display game, the probability variable A jackpot and the normal jackpot. There are three types of jackpots: probability variable A jackpot, probability variable B jackpot, and normal jackpot.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot), derivation of the support hit, and completion of the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to a third specific game state ST23, and the special game state. Of the variable probability big hits to be in a high probability state after the end of the game state, if it is a variable probability A big hit, it shifts to a second specific game state ST22, and if it is a probability variable B big hit, it shifts to a first specific game state ST21. .

Specifically, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation A jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and when there is V passage in the special game state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (probability variation operation area ) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, it shifts to the second specific game state ST22. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state When the ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the game moves to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is no V passage in the special game state does not flow), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the third specific game state ST23. Since the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23 are set to the same chance mode as the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of times of ST (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST21. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the normal game state ST24 may be entered.
In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST22. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, it may be shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the third specific game state ST23).
Also, in FIG. 84, the transition of the game state when a big hit is derived as a result of irregular variation is omitted. Specifically, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 84, for example, in the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game state ST23, as a result of irregular fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) A variable probability B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state (a game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch 38d If it is detected), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the first specific game state ST21.

When the normal jackpot is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the specific game state ST23, the game shifts to a normal game state ST24. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the normal jackpot support count is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the probability variable jackpot A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST22, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST22 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the second specific game state ST22, the game moves to the first specific game state ST21. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the probability variable A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of support times of the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state after the end of the special figure variation display game Move to ST23. In addition, in the first specific game state ST21 and the second specific game state ST22, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST22 after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot is derived passes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support hit is derived is the special It does not go through the game state. Therefore, for example, in the first specific game state ST21 (no support with a high probability), if the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, after the special figure variation display game ends, the special game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the second specific game state ST22 (with high probability support) without going through.

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the third specific game is performed until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) 50 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure variation display game is executed, the game moves to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "50 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "50 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), 100 without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit C out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), and 1000 without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the 3rd specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22). When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electricity support), that is, the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23. If so, the number of times of support is reset and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is set again (see FIG. 10). Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the presentation mode is changed according to the change in the number of remaining support. It should be noted that it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count (Fig. 11 (a) )reference). In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is You may make it change to the said upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (advantageous for the player) method) may be employed (FIG. 11(b)). In this case, the presentation mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed. Furthermore, when the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is not adopted, the support win symbol may be displayed on the display device 41 as the game result, or the losing symbol may be displayed instead of the support win symbol as the game result. It may be displayed on the display device 41 .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39, or flow into out port 30a and play area 32 discharged from When the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the player wins. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 82).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34 by firing a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), and the normal figure start gate 34 General winning prize port 35, normal variable winning device 37, second start winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39, second special variable winning device 39 Players can aim to win a prize through the general prize winning opening 35 arranged on the left side.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this general-purpose starting winning prize is displayed on the general-purpose holding indicator of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100, as a process of executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display unit provided in the collective display device 50, predetermined multiple lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time is determined in advance. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order shown, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the normal figure display unit of the collective display device 50 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is displayed variably for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed to display the result. It may be configured to display.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is hit, the normal pattern display unit of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the lighting pattern as a special result mode, operates the general electric solenoid 37c, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is controlled to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the result on the general pattern display section of the collective display device 50 .

In addition, the winning balls to the first start winning opening 36, the winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning balls to the second starting winning opening 97 are respectively provided inside the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2. It is detected by switch 37a and start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is stored in a predetermined upper limit number ( For example, 4) is stored to the limit, and the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the second start prize opening 97 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) memorize to Based on the winning to the first starting winning port 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the second starting winning port 97, a big hit random number value, a special pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively, The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as the first starting memory and the second starting memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the first memory display unit (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 At the same time, it is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs a special figure 1 variable display game with a special figure 1 display device (first variation display device) of the collective display device 50 based on the first start memory, and a collective display device based on the second start memory. A special figure 2 variation display game is performed with 50 special figure 2 indicators (second variation display devices). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (jackpot). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 (first start winning region) or normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning region) It constitutes first execution control means for controlling the execution of the first variable display game (first special figure variable display game). In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) a second execution control means for controlling the execution of

In the special figure 1 indicator and the special figure 2 indicator of the collective display device 50, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device becomes a special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result and the big hit. Then, it becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator or the special figure 2 indicator becomes a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. It becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small win state). That is, the special figure 1 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 constitutes a first variable display means. In addition, the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 second variation display means form.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be equipped with the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the case of the normal game state which is a low probability state, the variation time is the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. A very long (approximately 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁In addition, the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be awarded, and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST24, first specific game state ST21) are specified. a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) and a special game state; is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variable A jackpot) of the special results, a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is a special result When a different specific result (support hit) is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state (see FIG. 84).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) occurs with a predetermined probability until the special game state occurs, it is possible to suppress the player's usage amount and suppress the reduction speed of the ball. is possible, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the specific game state (general electric support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, there is a risk that gambling will become too high. When the game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the number of balls released in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the wave of paid out balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST23). When a result is obtained, the specific game period being set can be reset so that the period corresponding to the specific result can be set again (see FIG. 10).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (support number) Since it is possible to extend the time, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST23). When a result is obtained, the period corresponding to the specific result can be added to the remaining period of the specific game period, which can be reset as the specific game period (Fig. 11(a)). reference).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (support number) Since it will be extended, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means, after the special game state occurs Occurred specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) and specific game state that occurred without the occurrence of a special game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) And, it can be configured to be able to execute the production.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23).
In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), different forms of effects may be executed. Thereby, whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot), or a specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (support hit) Since it is possible to suggest whether it is in the state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same mode of effect may be executed.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state ( When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same between the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same mode of presentation may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) and the corresponding number of support times of 100 times. The effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (in the case of the present embodiment, the support hit B) may be the same.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous for the player. When this happens, it is possible to configure so as to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the current game (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest of the game.
Of course, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment also has the effects illustrated in the first embodiment. It is possible to execute an additional effect, etc., which is performed after the display game ends. Further, in the present embodiment, modifications ([Modified example 1 of support hit determination] to [Modified example 5 of support hit determination], [Other modified example 1] to [Other modified example 11] in the first embodiment ] etc.) can be applied as appropriate.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Also, the configurations of the modifications and embodiments described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

For example, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game, and the gaming machine 10 may be a special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game with priority over the 2 fluctuation display game, or a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in order of winning, or the special figure 1 It may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a game machine that does not simultaneously display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory on the display device 41. . That is, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory may be displayed on the display device 41 at the same time.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a gaming machine having a specific area (variable probability operating area). That is, based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (the specific area switch 38d has detected the game ball), instead of generating a high probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a probability variable big hit. Based on this fact, a high probability state may be generated.

10 game machine 37 normal variable winning device 100 game control device (game control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
a game control means for controlling a game;
a normal variable winning device that satisfies the starting condition by winning a game ball,
The game control means is
It is possible to generate a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device than in the normal game state,
When the result of the game results in a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated after the stop display period for displaying the result of the game without going through the special game state. and
The special results and the specific results each include a plurality of types of results,
determining which of the special result, the specific result, and the losing result as the result of the game by a first lottery random number;
when the lottery result obtained by the first lottery random number is the special result or the specific result, determining the type of the special result or the specific result using one second lottery random number;
A variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game;
A variation pattern scenario in which information about the transition of the variation pattern table in the specific gaming state is defined,
A gaming machine, wherein when the specified result is derived, the variation pattern scenario to be used in the specified game state based on the specified result is selected based on the type of the specified result.

Images